View original document

The full text on this page is automatically extracted from the file linked above and may contain errors and inconsistencies.

SENATE

100TH CONGRESS

2d Sesion

I

JEl

REPORT
100-321

THE 1988
JOINT ECONOMIC REPORT

REPORT
OF THE

JOINT ECONOMIC COMMITTEE
CONGRESS OF THE UNITED STATES
ON THE

1988 ECONOMIC REPORT
OF THE PRESIDENT
TOGETHER WITH

MINORITY AND ADDITIONAL VIEWS

APRIL

22 (legislative day,

APRIL 11,

1988.-Ordered to be printed

U.S. GOVERNMENT PRINTING OFFICE
84-405

WASHINGTON:

1988

JOINT ECONOMIC COMMITTEE
[Created pursuant to Sec. 5(a) of Public Law 304, 79th Cong.]
PAUL S. SARBANES, Maryland, Chairman
LEE H. HAMILTON, Indiana, Vice Chairman
HOUSE OF REPRESENTATIVES
SENATE
WILLIAM PROXMIRE, Wisconsin
LLOYD BENTSEN, Texas
EDWARD M. KENNEDY, Massachusetts
JOHN MELCHER, Montana
JEFF BINGAMAN, New Mexico
WILLIAM V. ROTH, JR., Delaware
STEVEN D. SYMMS, Idaho
ALFONSE M. D'AMATO, New York
PETE WILSON, California

AUGUSTUS F. HAWKINS, California
DAVID R. OBEY, Wisconsin
JAMES H. SCHEUER, New York
FORTNEY H. (PETE) STARK, California
STEPHEN J. SOLARZ, New York
CHALMERS P. WYLIE, Ohio
OLYMPIA J. SNOWE, Maine
HAMILTON FISH, JR., New York
J. ALEX McMILLAN III, North Carolina

JUDITH DAVISON, Executive Director
RICHARD F. KAUFMAN, General Counsel
STEPHEN QUICK, Chief Economist
ROBERT J. TOSTERUD, Minority Assistant Director
(II)

LETTER OF TRANSMITTAL

MARCH

Hon.

ROBERT

C.

5, 1987.

BYRD,

Majority Leader, US. Senate,
Washington, DC
DEAR MR. LEADER: Pursuant to the requirements of the Employment Act of 1946, as amended, I hereby transmit the Report of the
Joint Economic Committee. The analyses and conclusions of this
Report are to assist the several committees of the Congress and its
Members as they deal with economic issues and legislation pertaining thereto.
Sincerely,
PAUL S. SARBANES, Chairman.
(111)

CONTENTS
Page

I. Introduction .............................................................
II. The Outlook .............................................................
..............................................
1987 in Retrospect ...............
Prospects for 1988 ..............................................................
III. Economic Policy and Performance .............................................................
Economic Growth............
Investment.....................................................................................................
Interest Rates .....................................................
Savings...........................................................................................................
The Budget Deficit .....................................................
The Trade Deficit .....................................................
Unemployment..............................................................................................
Productivity...................................................................................................
Inflation..........................................................................................................

1
2
2
4
7
8...............
8
10
11
12
12
14
14
15

THE LEGACY OF EXPERIMENT
IV. Debt and Deficit ...............................................................

16

Financial Instability ...............................................................
V. International Imbalances ...............................................................
The U.S. Trade Deficit ..............................................................
Explaining the Trade Deficit ..............................................................
The Long-term Consequences: America as a Debtor Nation ................
VI. Domestic Imbalances ...............................................................

26
27
27
33
46
50

Borrowing by the Federal Government ....................................................
Prospects for Federal Borrowing ..............................................................
Borrowing by the Private Sector ..............................................................

Manufacturing...............................................................................................
Agriculture.....................................................................................................
Civilian/Military ..............................................................
VII. Income Stagnation and Inequality ..............................................................
Trends in the Growth and Distribution of Income .................................
Explaining Stagnation and Growing Inequality .....................................
VIII. Distorted Priorities ..............................................................
...........................................
Investment Deficits ...................
Education.......................................................................................................
Health.............................................................................................................
Physical Infrastructure ...............................................................
.............................
Statistical Infrastructure .................................
Research and Development ..............................................................
..............................................
Energy Security ................
IX. Conclusion...............................................................................................................
The Challenge of the 1990's ..............................................................
Additional Views of Senator Lloyd Bentsen ..............................................................
......................
.
Additional Views of Representative Augustus F. Hawkins
Minority and Additional Views ..............................................................
(V)

17
18
21

50
55
64
66
66
72
81
82
83
89
91
99
103
108
113
114
117
119
120

100TH CONGRESS

2d Session

REPORT

SENATE

100-321

THE 1988 JOINT ECONOMIC REPORT

APRIL 22 (legislative day, APRIL 11), 1988.-Ordered to be printed

Mr.

SARBANES,

from the Joint Economic Committee,
submitted the following

REPORT
together with
MINORITY AND ADDITIONAL VIEWS
I. INTRODUCTION

In its Annual Report one year ago, the Joint Economic Committee observed that, while the economy appeared tranquil, warning
signs lurked just below the surface. The Committee's August 1987
staff study, "The Economy at Mid-Year. A Legacy of Debt," reiterated that concern. The study focused on the warning signal of the
growing U.S. foreign debt, which in five years has transformed the
United States from the world's largest creditor nation to the
world's largest debtor nation and returned the United States to net
debtor status for the first time since 1919.
Another warning signal was the 508-point decline in the stock
market on October 19, an event "without historical precedent," as
one witness observed to the Committee. The turbulence in the capital markets has raised serious questions about the operations of
the markets, the stability of the financial system, and the strength
of the economy in the months ahead.
1988 is therefore an uncertain year with respect to the economic
outlook. In the aftermath of October 19, virtually all gross national
product (GNP) growth forecasts were revised downward. Many predicted very slow growth during 1988, and some an actual recession
as a consequence of the stock market collapse and other signs of
economic weakness. Subsequent events have called these forecasts
into question, however, and some now raise fears about possible capacity constraints and inflationary overheating of the economy.
Forecasting the precise course of the U.S. economy is not the
task of this Committee, but the pattern of volatility in both the

2

real economy and the views of forecasters is itself a cause for concern. It indicates uncertainty in both the financial markets and the
forecasting community about our economic future, and deepens our
concerns about potential problems which could cause major dislocation in the future.
The concerns are not limited to the effects of the October market
shock, but include the high consumer debt burden; the prospects
for continued slow growth in the rest of the world; the absence of
concerted action to address the problem of Third World debt; the
persistent volatility in the capital markets; and the sustainability
of deficit reduction in the event of an economic downturn. While
the volume of U.S. exports is increasing, in what appears to be the
long-awaited and long-delayed response to the decline in the exchange value of the dollar, the volume of imports continues to rise,
raising concerns about our ability to maintain steady progress on
improving the external trade balance.
Perhaps the greatest uncertainty concerns monetary policy. In
the absence of unambiguous signs that the nominal trade deficit is
on a steay and sustainable downward path, it may prove difficult
to focus monetary policy solely on assuring domestic growth. The
potential dilemma for the Federal Reserve has been expressed
bluntly by H. Onno Ruding, Chairman of the policymaking committee of the International Monetary Fund (IMF), in his remark that
the United States will have to "tailor monetary and interest rate
policy more to external considerations." In his blunt words, "My
American friends are not accustomed to the fact that the United
States is a highly indebted country."
The concerns reflect increasing skepticism about the foundation
on which the current recovery has been built. Having begun in the
wake of the worst recession since the Great Depression of the
1930's, the recovery has been achieved at the cost of transforming
the United States from a nation which typically produced more
than it spent into a nation buying substantially more than it pro-duces. The U.S. foreign debt, accumulated over the past five years,
now stands at an estimated $400 billion; in the next decade it is
expected to reach the $750 billion-$1 trillion range before leveling
off and then declining. Such excessive imbalances cannot be sustained indefinitely, and although they were accumulated rapidly,
they almost certainly cannot be remedied at a comparable pace.
Their emergence is not happenstance. The stunning deterioration
of the U.S. external position reflects a fundamental mismatch of
fiscal and monetary policies in recent years.
This year's Report reviews the short-term and long-term outlook
for the economy against the background of the economic policies
which have dominated the 1980's. It underscores the challenges we
face if we are to have the vigorous economy which is crucial to the
health of our society and to our standing in the world.

JI.

THE OUTLOOK

1987 IN RETROSPECT

1987 was a mixed year for the economy. Many key indicators of
economic performance showed unusual volatility during the year
while extreme instability characterized the financial markets.

3

Taken together, the economic events of 1987 have created a climate
of uncertainty about the economic prospects for 1988.
Among the principal developments of 1987 were the following:
Real GNP growth of 3.9 percent. This growth figure was encouraging although almost 40 percent of the increase in output in 1987
went into inventories. Sales to domestic purchasers-which in previous years had been growing faster than output-slowed considerably in 1987. The $16 billion improvement in our net exports last
year, after adjusting for inflation, was a small but welcome source
of strength.
October 19 stock market drop. The Dow Jones Average fell 508
points, or 22 percent, in a single day, following the 108-drop on October 16. Similar plunges occurred in stock markets worldwide. Between October 14 and October 20, the Dow lost close to 30 percent
of its value. Although the market has partially recovered from the
October decline, it remains unusually volatile.
Declining unemployment. After hovering in the range of 7 to 75
percent from 1984 through 1986, the unemployment rate declined
significantly during the last year to its current level of 5.6 percent.
Disappointing productivity improvement. Output per worker rose
only 0.9 percent during 1987, the lowest increase during the current expansion. The 3.3 percent growth in manufacturing productivity, while higher than the overall growth rate, was also lower
than any year since 1983.
Volatility in interest rates and monetary policy. Interest rates
rose significantly during 1987 as money supply growth slowed, only
to fall sharply after October 19 as the monetary authorities moved
quickly to assure liquidity in the financial system. Most interest
rates, however, are still higher than they were a year ago.
Moderate inflation. The Consumer Price Index (CPI) rose 4.4 percent, up from the 1.1 percent of 1986, but still well within moderate
limits. Volatile oil prices contribute to substantial variation in the
year-to-year inflation rate, while the "core" inflation continues to
hover in the 4 percent range.
Instability in the foreign exchange markets. Several strong
moves against the dollar drove its value down well below the levels
endorsed by the major trading nations, while several equally strong
central bank interventions served temporarily to reverse the downward drift.
Piecemeal efforts to address the continuing Third World debt
crisis. Brazil declared, then renounced, a moratorium on debt service, the major Latin American debtors issued a strongly worded
consensus statement on the magnitude of the problem, major banks
set aside significant loan loss reserves, and an innovative proposal
for discounting Mexican debt met with an unenthusiastic response
from private commercial banks.
U.S. net debtor status. In 1985, for the first time since 1919, the
United States, which as recently as 1982 was the world's largest
creditor, became a debtor nation, borrowing a record $141 billion
from abroad. 1987 surpassed the 1986 figure, leaving the United
States with a net foreign debt of roughly $400 billion at the end of
the year.
Growing nominal trade deficit. The U.S. trade deficit grew by $15
billion 1987 to $171 billion. The $20 billion improvement anticipat-

4
ed by the administration as late as midyear failed to materialize.
The rate of growth in the deficit slowed, however, as exports rosean encouraging sign that the deficit might start to decline in 1988.
Strains in the financial system. There were 202 bank failures in
1987, compared to fewer than eight per year during the 1970's and
10 per year in 1980 and 1981. While the Federal Deposit Insurance
Coporation (FDIC) seemed able to cope with the volume of bank
failures, the Federal Savings and Loan Insurance Corporation
(FSLIC) and the Farm Credit System (FCS) did not have the resources to meet the potential demands upon them and both required congressional action to assure recapitalization.
This brief outline suggests the degree to which 1987, taken as a
whole, could provide support for conflicting views about the state
and future of the American economy. Those forecasting continued
growth could point to the export, inflation, and employment trends
of last year. Those forecasting a slowdown could point to stagnant
personal incomes, rising inventories, growing debt burdens, and the
psychological effects of the stock market crash.
PROSPECTS FOR 1988

Given the mixed signals of 1987, it is hardly surprising that
there is considerable uncertainty among professional forecasters
about the course of the economy in 1988.
In the April 10 survey of 50 economists reported by the Blue
Chip Economic Indicators, the consensus growth forecast for 1988
was 2.4 percent, compared with a consensus of 1.9 percent in November and 2.8 percent prior to October 19. But the April survey
saw this consensus forecast rise as analysts revised their thinking
about a number of critical sectors of the economy. The Congressional Budget Office (CBO) projects a 1.8 percent real growth rate for
this year, while the administration's latest forecast is for 2.4 percent real growth, revised downward from the 3.5 percent growth
forecast issued last August.
A review of the components of GNP highlights the uncertainties
which give rise to the variability of economic forecasts.
1. Consumer spending.-Consumer spending, which accounts for
two-thirds of GNP, has been the driving force of the current recovery and has been strong despite the sluggish rate of growth in disposable income. Consumers have been saving less of their income
while borrowing more heavily and there is considerable question
whether this pattern will continue.
Last year consumers saved only 3.7 percent of their after-tax
income. This is barely half the rate achieved in 1981 and the lowest
level in 40 years. At the same time, the debt-to-income ratio for
American households remained at an historically high 16 percent.
In the fourth quarter of 1987, however, the savings rate jumped
sharply, from 2.8 percent in the third quarter to 4.8 percent. As a
result, total personal consumption expenditures fell at an annual
rate of 2.5 percent. If this marks the start of a trend, consumer
spending could remain weak through much of 1988 as households
attempt to rebuild their balance sheets.
2. Investment.-Investment performance last year was mixed.
Home building declined by 2.4 percent, while business investment

5
in plant and equipment rose 5.1 percent. The rise in business investment, however, just offset a 4.7 percent decline in 1986, meaning no increase over the two-year period.
Several signs suggest continued weak housing activity in 1988.
First, housing starts, a leading indicator of residential construction
activity, declined through much of last year and in December were
at the lowest level since the end of the 1981-1982 recession. It is
too early to say whether the upturn in housing starts in February
will contunue, and the current level remains well below last year's.
Second, the drop in personal wealth and consumer confidence in
the wake of October 19 will make some potential home buyers
more cautious. Third, increases in mortgage rates and home prices
in 1987 will carry over to the early part of 1988. Finally, the bankruptcy of a major mortgage insurance firm appears to be leading to
a reduction in insurance underwriting of low down-payment mortgages, a development which could force many first-time buyers out
of the housing market.
The outlook for nonresidential investment is similarly clouded.
The Commerce Department reported in December that business
plans to raise its spending on new plant and equipment by 7.3 percent this year, after adjustment for inflation. If the Commerce Department estimate is borne out, nonresidential fixed investment
will be a significant source of economic strength in 1988, but there
are reasons to question this estimate. Capital goods orders have not
been particularly strong, while the overall industrial capacity utilization rate was 82 percent in December, well below the 87 percent
figure at the peak of the recovery of the late 1970's. Even in industries where capacity is tight, there is little evidence of major new
capital spending to add new capacity.
3. Exports and imports.-The U.S. real net export deficit declined
10 percent over the four quarters of 1987. All of the improvement
came on the export side, with real exports rising by 17 percent.
Real imports continued to grow, but more slowly, by 9 percent. The
continued rise in imports occurred despite a substantial 9.6 percent
increase in the prices of imports other than fuels. This development indicates the strength of Amercian demand for imports and
in many cases the willingness of foreign producers to cut profit
margins in the interests of maintaining a share of the American
market.
Previous forecasts of a significant drop in our net imports have
not been borne out, however, as the competitive effects of the declining value of the dollar have been slow to be realized. The dollar
peaked three years ago, in early 1985, and has declined consistently
since then, yet the trade deficit in current dollars reached a record
high in the last quarter of 1987. Whether the lags are simply
longer than anticipated or whether the fundamental theory needs
reexamination, the past record of excessive optimism suggests the
need for caution with respect to the trade outlook for 1988.
4. Government spending-Many analysts expect Federal purchases of goods and services in real terms to decline in 1988, in accordance with the congressional-executive budget agreement and
the assumptions in the President's budget. Real spending by state
and local governments is not likely to rise faster than the moderate
pace of recent years. Overall, the government sector is unlikely to

6
be a significant factor in stimulating or restraining economic
growth.
While the consensus outlook remains one of moderate growth,
some forecasters are now beginning to raise questions about possible inflationary overheating of the economy. As evidence they cite
increasing consumer confidence, capacity constraints in key industries, and increasingly tight labor markets.
These views do not command a majority of forecasters, but concerns about possible overheating cannot be dismissed out of hand.
From the point of view of capital markets, an inflationary overheating of the American economy could produce substantial problems, especially in the bond market.
The CPI last year rose 4.4 percent, after having risen only 1.1
percent in 1986 in the wake of collapsing oil prices. Nonetheless
there are signs that inflation, while under control, remains a potential problem. Federal Reserve Board Chairman Alan Greenspan
told the Committee "Monetary policy needs to remain supportive of
the expansion but also alert to the possibility of a reemergence of
inflation." Some of the reasons for this concern are:
First, the falling dollar. By raising import prices, the declining
dollar creates an opportunity for domestic producers of import-competing goods to raise their prices as well. While thus far much of
the dollar's decline has been absorbed in the profit margins of foreign producers, further declines are likely to be accompanied by
price increases.
Second, capacity utilization. Recently, strong output gains have
occurred in export industries that have benefited from the lower
dollar. Many industries are currently operating at or near full capacity. The continuation of tight monetary and loose fiscal policies
of recent years led to an unprecedented rise in the value of the
dollar that undermined U.S. competitiveness in both domestic and
foreign markets. The effect was to discourage investment in many
export industries. Additional demand is thus more likely to
produce price increases rather than output increases.
Third, sectoral inflation. Prices are rising at a rapid rate in some
sectors of the economy. As Figure 1 shows, inflation in such key
service sectors as health and transportation is running substantially ahead of the overall price level.

7

FIGURE 1
1967 PRICE INCREASES

ALL fEMS
OURASLEX
NOf-URAES
AUMOS
FUEL

LTH1
TRANlMrA11ON
AS TRANSPMrAION
on

2%

4%

e%

8%

10%

Finally, wage pressures have been remarkably restrained despite
recent strong employment growth and tightening in certain regional labor markets. There is a real question whether workers, whose
share of national income has declined significantly over the past
six years, will accept a declining living standard in a climate of relatively high employment, tight labor markets, and rising corporate
profitability.

The picture on employment is mixed. The first quarter employment statistics saw a drop in the overall unemployment rate and a
rise in the number of persons employed. At the same time, the consensus among the forecasters surveyed in April by the Blue Chip
group was that the jobless rate will rise slightly in 1988 because
growth will be too slow to prevent higher unemployment. In the
more detailed Blue Chip Economic Indicators released in January,
only five forecasters foresaw a decline in the unemployment rate
and this group, on average, forecast GNP growth of 3.1 percent,
above the consensus forecast. Thus it is likely that the unemployment rate will decline only if 1988 GNP growth is higher than 3
percent, and rise if growth is lower than 3 percent.
III. ECONOMIC POLCY AND PERFORMANCE
In 1981, the country embarked on a period of radical shifts in
economic policy. Fiscal policy was transformed by a rapid increase
in defense spending that exceeded restraints in spending on domestic programs and was coupled with a cut in the revenue base. Monetary policy has been characterized by unusually high and persistent real interest rates, despite a relative decline of nominal rates
following abandonment of Federal Reserve targeting practices.
A careful review indicates, however, that, as a result of these
radical shifts in policy, many key indicators showed weaker economic performance in the 1980's than in the 1970's. Others showed

8
performance in the 1980's as no better than in previous periods and
some indicators showed a better performance.
ECONOMIC GROWTH

Figure 2 shows the actual performance of real GNP relative to a
trend line constructed from all the years between 1947 and 1980.
The chart shows that real economic growth slipped below trend
during the latter part of the 1970's, experienced a period of relatively fast growth during 1984 and 1985, and then slowed, remaining below trend for the rest of the period. Thus while GNP has continued to grow, there has been no acceleration in the growth rate.
FIGURE 2
REAL GROSS NATIONAL PRODUCT
ACTUAL VS. 1947-198 TREND
MTbnS of1962 OoWm)
.4.5

4.0

TWO*UNEA

3.5

/

2.0
1.5
1.0

1947

1962

1957

192

1967

1972

1977

192

1967

INVESTMENT

The United States has traditionally had gross investment of
roughly 16 percent of GNP, a rate below that in other industrialized countries. The rate of "net" investment (gross investment
minus depreciation) traditionally averaged roughly 7 percent of
GNP. As Figure 3 demonstrates, the ratio of gross investment to
GNP hovered around its historic average of 16 percent during the
1980's, but net investment plummeted, averaging only a little more
than 4 percent during the period. There is no persuasive evidence
that investment responded positively to various incentives built
into economic policy during the 1980's.

9

FIGURE 3
INVESTMENT AS A SHARE OF GNP
MOSS ANfD NET PFATAE NEWDA

12% - 147-IMq, *vg
14%
13%

10%

.

..

194710 1963
19

,

'^

169
190

I

,W

1986 1971 1974 1977 1960 1963 196

In terms of increasing the growth potential of the economy, perhaps the most important statistic on investment is the ratio of net
nonresidential fixed investment to net national product (NNP).
This provides a measure of the rate at which a country is adding to
its private capital stock, after subtracting the value of investment
which merely replaces capital which has worn out during the year.
As Figure 4 suggests, this ratio plunged dramatically between 1980
and 1983, rose slightly in 1984 and 1985, then fell again in 1986,
the latest year for which data are available.
FIGURE 4
NET NONRESIDENTIAL INVESTMENT
ASA

AMEOF NET NAW1N&L PFOKUCT

10

Combining the data in Figure 4 into five-year segments in the
following table clearly shows the deterioration in net investment
that has occurred.
TABLE

Period:
1951
1956
1961
1966
1971
1976
1981

1.-Net nonresidentialfixed investment as a percentageof NNP
3.4
3.1
3.2
4.4
3.7
3.6
2.5

1955 ...........................................................
1960 ...........................................................
1965 ...........................................................
1970 ...........................................................
1975 ............................................................
1980 ...........................................................
1986 ............................................................

to
to
to
to
to
to
to

INTEREST RATES

On major reason for the unimpressive performance of investment
(set out in the previous table and figure) has been the very high
interest rates. Figure 5 shows that both nominal and real interest
rates (nominal rates minus the change in the CPI over the past 12
months) were pushed to historic highs during the 1980's, and that
both have remained at historically high levels even after the peak.
FIGURE 5
LONG-TERM INTEREST RATES

~~~ON GOVERNMENT

-

BONDS

.12%

¶2%10%

lvitl16:1

*1iml.i

19is:1 Isia 16 *:1 19i.1

: I9 I

I

No only were interest rates high, they were also volatile. Volatile
interest rates have generally negative effects on business investment planning, while creating opportunities for excessive speculation in the capital markets. The profound change in the interestrate environment is shown in an index of day-to-day interest-rate
volatility compiled by Data Resources, Inc. (Figure 6).

11

FIGURE 6
INDEX OF INTEREST RATE VOLATIUTY

19et

19s

IM&I

11

SAVINGS

In 1980 individuals saved 7.1 percent of their after-tax income.
One of the main goals of the supply-side program was to increase
additional personal saving. Despite the remarkable rate reductions
and other specific saving incentives, the personal saving rate fell to
3.7 percent by 1987. Individuals today are saving only about half as
much as they did seven years ago, and the saving rate is the lowest
since 1947 (see Figure 7).
FIGURE 7
Personal Saving as a Percentage of
Disposable Personal Income, 19501987
10%
U

a
7
5

S
4

3

12
THE BUDGET DEFICIT

In 1981 the administration asserted that "the Federal budget will
actually generate a surplus in 1985 and 1986, for the first time
since 1969." As Figure 8 demonstrates, exactly the reverse happened, and the Federal budget deficit swelled during the 1980's.
FIGURE 8
THE FEDERAL BUDGET DEFICIT
in UWkme oi(Wkn

'I

SISI

-

6140 -

$140 $120 $1200
SWa -

SW so -

(S20)1900

A.
-

WW

,.mk

A, __
-

A

-A

-

.970

19i0

1.07

THE TRADE DEFICIT

The high interest rates and large budget deficits of the 1980's,
combined with a policy of indifference toward the exchange rate
and the competitiveness of American firms, drove the dollar well
above its competitive level and helped create a massive trade deficit for the United States (Figure 9).

13
FIGURE 9
TRADE-WEIGHTED DOLLAR INDEX

As Figure 10 shows, America's overall trade balance on goods
and services posted a small but steady surplus through the 1970's,
then dropped precipitously in the 1980's. The figure also demonstrates that the merchandise trade account began to deteriorate at
an earlier stage, and experienced a deeper decline than the balance
on goods and services. Trade in services, and investment earnings
on direct investment abroad, kept the broader trade measure in
surplus during the late 1970's, but the accumulating merchandise
deficits transformed the United States from a creditor to a debtor
in 1985, largely removing net investment income as a counterbalance to the merchandise trade deficit.

FIGURE 10
THE AMERICAN TRADE BALANCE
Bane

in81111
G
ofdkna
on and S
Gtads

14
UNEMPLOYMENT

Unemployment rose to a post-Depression high early in the 1980's,
and has subsided slowly in the years since the peak (Figure 11).
During 1987, the unemployment rate began to decline more rapidly
as the manufacturing sector reversed its earlier pattern of job
losses and began adding workers. Most of the job growth during the
1980's has come in the service sector of the economy.
FIGURE 11
CMLIAN UNEMPLOYMENT RATE

11%

10%

4%.

2%
IM19t 19MItto 19i 1

i~t
9i&.1 19ial

:ii 1972.:1 19i6:1 19X0. 1 9i4:t t1"81

At 5.6 percent, today's civilian unemployment rate is the lowest
since 1979. It remains higher than the unemployment rate at earlier cyclical peaks, however, and questions have been raised about
the stability of employment given the much greater use of temporary workers than in the past.
Reported unemployment levels in rural America are considerably higher than the national average. Rural unemployment rates
have averaged almost 2 percent higher than metropolitan areas
over the 1980's. In addition, it is possible that reported rates understate actual unemployment levels due to under counting, discouraged worker problems, and underemployment.
PRODUCTIVITY

Productivity figures from the 1980's also show little if any improvement over earlier periods resulting from the 1981 supply-side
tax cuts. During the 1981-1982 recession, nonfarm business productivity fell far below the long-term trend, as Figure 12 shows, and
has failed to catch up during the recovery. After a brief spurt
during the early years of the expansion, productivity growth subsequently subsided and left output per worker even further below
trend by 1987 despite continuing productivity gains in the manufacturing sector.

15

FIGURE 12
NONFARM BUSINESS SECTOR PROOUCTIvrTy
1077 - lo

INFLATION

During the 1980's, substantial progress was made
inflation in the American economy. Initially, controlon controlling
of inflatiion
was accomplished through high interest rates, high unemployment,
and a deep recession. During the recovery, inflation remained
dued because of substantial excess capacity in many industries, subrelatively high unemployment, and the price-depressing
effects of imports and the overvalued dollar. When the dollar started
inflation did not pick up as many had predicted, owing to decline,
the simultaneous and unanticipated decline in world oil largely to
a willingness of foreign producers to cut prices and profitprices and
margins
rather than raise U.S. prices of their products (Figure
13).

16
FIGURE 13
CHANGE IN THE CONSUMER PRICE INDEX
l5%.
13%
12%
11%
10%
9%
6%
7%
6%
6%
4%
3%

2%
1%.
0%
.1%.
-3%
.4% 4
1946:1 1952:1 19i&:1 1960& 1964:1 1966:1 19721 1976:1 1960:1 1964:1 1966:1

IV.

THE LEGACY OF EXPERIMENT: DEBT AND DEFICIT

The principal legacy left to the future by the period of economic
experimentation in the 1980's is a formidable accumulation of financial claims on future output. Unfortunately, the real assets necessary to create future output have failed to expand at a comparable rate. Federal fiscal policy has been based on deficit financing
on a scale unprecedented in peacetime history, thereby pushing off
into the future the burdensome task of paying for current spending. The trade deficits which converted this country from a creditor
nation to a debtor nation have resulted in a substantial set of
future obligations to foreign investors. Households and firms built
up their own debt at a record pace.
The result of this massive process of debt accumulation by government, business, households, and the Nation as a whole is a
stock of debt which is large relative to our national income. As
Figure 14 demonstrates, the debt-to-GNP ratio for the United
States, after holding steady for 25 years following World War II,
has risen during the 1980's to heights not seen since the late 1920's
and early 1930's. This deterioration in such an important financial
ratio raises serious concerns about the stability of the economy in
the future.

17
FIGURE 14
U.S. DEBT TO GNP RATIO

1=2 1937 1042 1947 1I62 1957 1962 1967

i72 1977 lw2 11

BORROWING BY THE FEDERAL GOVERNMENT

The problem of deficits became clear in the early 1980's, but refusal on the part of the administration to consider a balanced approach to deficit reduction led to a budget impasse for most of the
subsequent years. The result of the impasse was soaring credit activity by the Federal Government, both in the form of direct borrowing and indirect use of credit markets to finance public programs (Figure 15).

FIGURE 15
FEDERAL DEBT
ON
JA.

o deLMa
d

I

1.4

ta
l.0

0.2

02

loll

i9o2

1083

1914
se

INS

iou
Is"

1967
IU7

18
PROSPECTS FOR FEDERAL BORROWING

The October stock market crash and strong international pressure on the dollar required the administration to take a less confrontational posture on both revenue and military spending issues.
The resulting budget compromise represents an important first
step toward resolving the Federal deficit problem, but it remains
only a first step.
Figure 16 shows the predictions for the course of the deficit
through Fiscal Year (FY) 1992 as produced by both the President's
Office of Management and Budget (OMB) and the Congressional
Budget Office. CBO's predictions are for a more substantial deficit
that declines less quickly than that foreseen by the administration,
a difference which largely reflects different assumptions about the
future of the economy.
FIGURE 16
THE FEDERAL BUDGET DEFICIT
___UONS OF ;0UA,

F767980

aY82

FIacW Yoma

6364i8666?U

001w 3

P1018ww

It is important to note, however, that neither projection makes
any provision for the impact of recession, despite the fact that a
majority of private forecasters currently anticipate a recession
sometime within the next two years. Should a recession occur, the
Federal budget situation would deteriorate rapidly, risking a serious disruption in financial markets given the high baseline deficit.
Figure 17 shows the changes in the Federal deficit as a share of
GNP which took place during the past two recessions. In each case,
the Federal deficit deteriorated by roughly 4 percent of GNP. If
this pattern were to be repeated in the next recession, it could possibly drive the Federal deficit as high as 7 percent of GNP, an
amount nearly twice the size of household savings during 1987.
Deficits of this magnitude could put heavy pressure on both American and international capital markets. While international capital
markets have been willing to finance very high levels of U.S. Gov-

19
ernment borrowing in the past, there are real questions about their
willingness to finance expanding deficits in the event of recession.
FIGURE 17
FEDERAL BUDGET DEFICITS
ASSlAR
A
OF GNP

701,

,4r
73

to IF
,, re

no
i

aum
sw

a 8617 U USO
9

993

A closer look at the components of the Federal deficit also
serious concerns about the deficit-reduction process. Figure 18raises
demonstrates that virtually all of the progress on reducing the deficit
comes from growing surpluses in the government's trust-fund accounts (principally social security). According to CBO, the deficit
for all the activities of government not funded through trust funds
actually increases during future years, even as the combined or
"unified" Federal deficit declines.

20
FIGURE 18
SOURCES OF SURPLUS AND DEFICrT
Th

18.

:10-

Ful

m

_

llu

OBO has estimated that, in the absence of surpluses in various
trust funds, especially social security, the baseline deficit would increase from $254 billion in FY88 to $295 billion in FY93. Only
when the surpluses in the trust funds are included in the total
budget does the baseline deficit decrease from $157 billion in FY88
to $134 billion in FY93.
This raises concerns about both the path of deficit reduction into
the next decade and the social security amendment enacted in 1983
to assure the health of the social security system in both the short
run and long run. The 1983 changes were adopted to assure surpluses in the system necessary to respond to demographic and economic trends well into, the next century, and not as a back door
means of addressing the overall budget deficit.
In addition to this broad general problem, there are elements of
current budget practice which create the appearance of budget savings without the substance. Asset sales and off-budget activities are
two such areas deserving particular examination.
From the short-term perspective, loan sales offer the advantage
that any losses from the sale of the loan at less than book value
have no direct budget impact. Foregone interest and principal in
future years increase outyear deficits but this is another budget's
problem.
However, if the sales take place from off-budget portfolios, additional costs occur. Losses must be calculated after the sale and
therefore funds to cover these losses are requested and appropriated in a subsequent budget. Thus if revenues of $2.5 billion from
loan sales require the sale of $4 billion of loan principal, the $2.5
billion of revenue is counted in the fiscal year it is received while
the loss of $1.5 billion does not show up for at least another year.

21
BORROWING BY THE PRIVATE SECTOR

Like the Federal Government, the private sector has
taking
on a huge volume of new debt during the 1980's. Both been
households
and firms have expanded their borrowing substantially,
serious new questions about their abilities to service these raising
expanded
debt obligations in the event of a potential future economic
downturn.
1. Households.-Household debt has risen during the recent past,
driving most key financial ratios in the household sector to unprecedented heights.
The most frequently cited credit indicator is the
of
debt outstanding to household income. As Figure relationship
19
shows,
this
ratio has risen steadily throughout the 1980's.
FIGURE 19
RATIO OF TOTAL HOUSEHOLD DEBT

.4.

1S9t4

19rA

1MA l97.4

19d

i977.

1isw4 aW.

Because this comparison relates debt outstanding (a stock) to
household income (a flow) it could be misleading. However,
comparisons of stocks with stocks (household debt to household assets),
and flows with flows (interest payments as a share of household
income) yield results which confirm the broad trend toward
increased indebtedness in the household sector (Figures 20 and 21).

22

FIGURE 20

Hmfelm

iue1

-

19e2
is ices Ic

RAO

1971 1974 1977 imac

FIGURE 21
Issi

Payn

asama
Shy of

UlpasahlIncome

23
Households appear to be borrowing for a variety of reasons.
Some appear to borrow to maintain an existing standard of living
in the face of stagnant real income, since consumer purchases have
grown despite stagnating real wage and salary income. Borrowing,
and particularly short-term consumer borrowing on credit cards or
from retailers, makes up the difference. Recent reports from the
Federal Reserve Board also indicate that households at the upper
end of the income distribution have also taken on debt at a record
pace during the 1980's despite the fact that their incomes have increased rapidly.
For whatever reason, households may be getting further in debt
than they can manage and are becoming especially vulnerable to a
slowdown in the economy or further disruptions in asset markets.
In an unstable financial and economic environment, excessive debt
could precipitate an accelerating downturn as bankruptcies touch
off a cumulative process of economic contraction.
2. Business.-Corporations have also been going into debt to an
unusual degree. As Figure 22 shows, debt has been constantly
rising as a share of total sales and today stands at historically high
levels. Figure 23 shows that the ratio of interest payments to corporate sales is also at very high levels, although it has receded from
peaks reached earlier in the 1980's.

24
FIGURE 22
DEBT AS A SHARE OF SALES
NONAN03AL CORPORAATONS

5.4%

',~

J

50%

419

_

v

52%

1O6Z4

1957:4

19e4

19687:4

FIGURE 23
INTEREST PAYMENTS AS A SHARE OF SALES
NONFACLAoCNs

Figure 24 shows how the structure of that debt has changed,
with short-term debt assuming a larger share of the total debt
burden. Firms must constantly refinance the maturing short-term
debt, creating the potential for a crisis if debt comes due during a
period of high interest rates and falling demand for the firm's
product. Much of the shift in term structure occurred in reaction to
the extraordinarily high interest rates in 1981-1982. As an administration official at the time noted, "With interest rates at near-

25
record levels for over three years, business firms have been unable
to secure long-term financing at acceptable rates."
FIGURE 24
SHORT-TERM DEBT AS SHARE OF
TOTAL CORPORATE DEBT

1957:4

IMM4

1957:4

19724

Deterioration is also evident with respect to the shifting roles of
debt and equity finance in American firms. Firms have been retiring equity and expanding debt at a rapid pace in the 1980's (Figure
25). In addition, although not indicated in the figure, the wave of
corporate stock repurchases announced since the October 19 crash
is likely to contribute to a continuation of this trend into the
future. This shift in the source of corporate finance leaves corporations more vulnerable to earnings slowdowns, since debt service
must be paid while equity returns can be postponed during a downturn.

26
FIGURE 25
NET ISSUES OF DEBT AND EOUITY BY
NONFINANCIAL CORPORATE BUSINESS
Om
LUON OF DOOlAM
DaM

1U
140
140

40
too
40

.600
IMgo

I101066

10N
60

107

1975

1976

¶1

1064

1N?

If this substantial increase in debt had been used to finance new
plant and equipment, there would be less cause for concern, since
the new capacity would generate income in the future sufficient to
pay the costs of debt service. But, as was noted earlier in this
Report, corporate investment in the United States has not increased significantly during the 1980's, while corporate debt has
grown dramatically.
FINANCIAL INSTABILITY

The substantial growth of debt in all sectors of the economy is
only one aspect of the problems in the financial sector. As Roger
Kubarych, Chief Economist of the New York Stock Exchange, told
the Committee:
I think it is undisputable that risks in the financial
system have materially increased, not just because of the
stock market decline, but because of the volatility that we
have seen in virtually every financial market. I call it a
"contagion of instability" over the last year . . . it has left
a legacy of greater risk, greater appreciation of risk, measured volatility is higher, and just by any textbook analysis
the investors are going to demand a higher rate of return
to compensate for that risk, and that is going to increase
the long-term cost of capital. And over a very long period
of time, that is adverse for investment and for long-term
growth.
A profound restructuring of the securities markets has taken
place over the last five years, involving both a proliferation of new
instruments and worldwide market integration.
By almost any measure, stock markets in the United States and
worldwide were overvalued by October of last year. Figure 26

27
shows the rapid acceleration of stock market values beginning in
late 1982, a boom which pushed stock prices well above their historic ratios to the earnings of the underlying firms. The subsequent
collapse of the stock market provided clear evidence of the fragility
of the financial system.
FIGURE 26
THE DOW-JONES INDUSTRIAL AVERAGE
2.0
2.4.

2.2
2.62

IA.

1 .
0a ._
0.6
0.4
0k.2
47:1I

19S21
t

1U00

1g37:7

1974:5

1UZ1

l61

V. THE LEGACY OF EXPERIMENT: INTERNATIONAL IMBALANCES

In the 1980's, U.S. policies played a central role in creating large
imbalances in trade and capital flows. The combination of tight
monetary policy and large budget deficits raised real interest rates
substantially above historic norms, setting off a chain of events.
The high rates attracted foreign savings, helping to push up the exchange rate of the dollar. The rising dollar lowered the price of foreign goods relative to domestic production and helped expand imports while limiting exports. The combination of high real interest
rates and deteriorating exports led U.S. goods producers to scale
back investment in the United States. By 1985, the unsustainability of this trend convinced both the Treasury and international investors that the rise of the dollar could not continue, and policies
were shifted to lower the value of the dollar in international markets.
By pursuing macroeconomic policies that were the mirror image
of U.S. policies, other industrial countries also contributed to these
imbalances. The combination of restrictive fiscal policy and easier
monetary policy kept interest rates abroad below those in the
United States and restrained aggregate demand, reducing potential
markets for U.S. exports.
THE U.S. TRADE DEFICIT

Each of the last six years has set a record merchandise trade deficit. Last year the country imported $171 billion more goods than it
exported, according to Census calculations.

84-405 0 - 88 - 2

28
In 1980, the United States had a rough balance in its overall
trade position, as indiciated by the $2 billion surplus in the current
account. On a current-account basis, the $26 billion deficit in merchandise trade was more than offset by the $30 billion in net receipts of international investment income.
By the end of 1987, the current account and merchandise trade
deficits had both fallen to roughly 4 percent of GNP. Hardest hit
were the manufacturing, mining, and agricultural industries,
which lost sales to foreign producers in both the domestic and
export markets. The ratio of U.S. real goods production to U.S.
goods purchases declined from 100 percent in late 1980 to 91 percent at the end of 1987. This is discussed further in Chapter VI.
The decline during the 1981-1982 recession years was particularly remarkable since the U.S. recession was much deeper than the
average abroad. The U.S. trade balance had significantly improved
during the 1974-1975 and 1980 recessions as U.S. demand for imports fell more than foreign demand for our exports. This did not
occur in the 1981-1982 recession because the dollar's rise hurt U.S.
exports and gave an advantage to foreign exports. The decline in
the real trade balance aggravated the 1981-1982 recession, just as
the recent improvement in the balance has boosted the economy
(Figure 27).
FIGURE 27
U.S. Merchandis Trade

350

150
100

50
1970:1 9M2:

1974:1

197t8:1

1976:1

19=01

19MI1

1964:1

19ft1

Non-petroleum imports rose 116 percent in real terms from 1980
to 1987 and clearly absorbed the largest share of the rapid growth
in U.S. demand for goods during 1982 to 1987. Measured in 1982
dollars, from the fourth quarter of 1982 to the fourth quarter of
1987, U.S. purchases of nondefense goods grew by 27 percent or
$359 billion, while imports expanded at a much faster rate, growing 92 percent or $222 billion-from $243 billion to $465 billion.
Virtually every goods-producing industry lost domestic market
share to imports during this period (Figure 28).

29
In contrast, U.S. exports fared badly. In volume terms exports
declined 15 percent in 1980-1983, regaining their 1980 volume level
only by the second quarter of 1986. Between 1980 and 1987, export
volume expanded only 15 percent, while import volume grew 75
percent.
FIGURE 28
Import Shares of Major Industries
(Percent of New Supply)

Ft~bM Foft

0

10

.

.

20

---- -

EM=
Ahmrhwm
M*
Teak

sr
mmlali
Q

cranhlain Mad*

30

I

I

40
I
.

50 60
I
.

70

80

.

-pm 1980
_

1987

la=
P~m Ithtw
Peed MWmr
Tails M=Nhnay
Fmedmmnw

31136W
mw_

Tbemm. EquiFord

2

ma

Eudrat_ Corpow
hadst. &ScAm. ins".

Wm

rAwoe.wA Ap
TPOt &

Appiwo

mr
HL

Caww~wEeaioni.s

am

Source: Commerce Department

The manufacturing trade balance dropped from a $27 billion surplus in 1980 to a $138 billion deficit in 1987 (Figure 29). That $165
billion decline more than accounts for the $140 billion decline in
the overall U.S. trade deficit during that period.

30
FIGURE 29
Trade Balanoes by Sector
o
o
*10
-Wo

.40
40
40
.70.

40.
40.
*100.

-11o.

-120.
.130.

-140-150 l eo

-

-170 -ID -

Virtually every manufacturing industry had a substantially
lower trade balance in 1987 than it had in 1980. In only one industry-fertilizers-did both the trade balance improve and exports increase faster than imports. Unfortunately, this reflected weakness
rather than strength for the U.S. fertilizer industry. Its shipments
fell along with imports due to distress in U.S. agriculture while exports rose only 6 percent. Only three other manufacturing categories had higher trade balances in 1987 than in 1980. However, in
each case-pharmaceuticals, plastics, and other transport equipment (mostly aircraft)-imports rose at least three times faster
than exports during the period (Figure 30).

31
FIGURE 30
Crat_ khImpeub d Epo. fom 1,0
eMa Chm.
-tOO

f0rm
8

r111W7

lo

XO

Jg4X

100

200

MO

400

OfchwmIk"
Fem

U

m
Papo

a

-~

rohP

Sp

SpPUA

£
To~

ha

A

WW Aw"Mh.
MM~.

U

Sea

CamMPM A Off" Equlp.
TeFarm a

wa7

M r5
i

am" p.

P~n VWd
CO-Tewwpouf

qup.

F~unfm

Fow
Pan &Soerwc Equip.
SwOE Cawm

0"uusu

In high technology, the United States in 1980 had exports of $55
billion and imports of $28 billion. In 1980-1987 imports expanded
at an average annual rate of 16 percent to $80 billion. Despite the
booming world market for high technology products, U.S. exports
grew at an average annual rate of 5.7 percent to $81 billion. The
U.S. surplus in high-tech trade thus fell from $27 billion to $1 billion over the 1980-1987 period (Figure 31). Electronics trade with
Japan and the East Asian newly industrialized countries (NIC's)Taiwan, Korea, Hong Kong, and Singapore-deteriorated markedly, while the rest of the high-tech trade balance remained relatively stable.

32
FIGURE 31
Trade Balances in High Technology
MM-an of 0O401,11)

Jo
30 All 0th.
2010 0

-.----

-10-.

-

-20 40-

Elbonimith Japan£,A
_
,,, N..
,n
l

_196

.

^

481

I

483

1961

t

ltmt

In the capital goods category, which is closely related to high
technology, imports nearly tripled in 1980-1987, rising from $31 billion to $88 billion. The U.S. surplus in capital goods trade fell over
the same period from $43 billion to $2 billion (Figure 32).
FIGURE 32
Trade in Capital Goods

L

tea?

The trade balance in agriculture declined from a $23 billion surplus in 1980 to a $6 billion surplus in 1987 (Figure 29).
These declines must be set against the rapid increase in oil and
petroleum imports in recent years. While falling oil prices have
caused a drop in the nominal value of oil and related imports from

33
the 1985 level of $50 billion to $42 billion in 1987, import volume
has risen 35 percent over the same period. Energy experts predict
that in the future both volume and prices will rise, putting additional pressure on the U.S. trade account.
EXPLAINING THE TRADE DEFICIT

The United States now has by far the largest trade deficit of any
major industrialized country. A variety of structural factors contribute to the American trade problem:
The more open U.S. market. By most econometric estimates the
income elasticity of demand for imports in the United States substantially exceeds that in other countries. No other industrial country has ever permitted a surge of imports on the scale of U.S. imports in the 1980's.
Slowdown in foreign growth. In the 1960's and 1970's, the rest of
the world was expanding its output and income much faster than
the United States. This, along with a decline in the dollar in the
1970's, boosted demand for U.S. exports and helped them keep pace
with imports until 1980. In the 1980's, output and income have increased only marginally more abroad than in the United States.
U.S. growth fell behind with the recessions in 1980 and 1981-1982,
but caught up with the rebound in 1983-1984. Since mid-1984, however, U.S. and foreign growth have proceeded at comparable rates
(Figure 33). When foreign growth does not exceed U.S. growth, U.S.
exports tend to lag behind imports into the more open U.S. market.
FIGURE 33
U.S. and Foreign Real GNP Growth Rates
Foe

WoigtMd by U.S. EXvOfst

0.0%
7.0
7.0%
6.0%

2.83.

L 2.82.

822408:3

ae2~7:2

2A%

-2.0%

0Ml4M4

M*:=

Rapid improvement in U.S. foreign competitors' technology,
skills, and infrastructure for commercial purposes. The United
States generally retains a lead in these areas, but there are many
specific exceptions and the overall lead is shrinking.
U.S. producers' tendency, when-confronted with a major competitive trade threat, to shift to foreign sources of production more

34
quickly than foreign producers. Whether by social legislation (as in
Europe) or social convention (as in Japan), foreign producers face
major impediments to shutting down local production in favor of
sourcing production abroad.
Absent some strong countervailing action by U.S. economic
policy, these structural conditions would produce a slow deterioration in America's trade accounts. Even so, they do not provide adequate explanation for the precipitous decline in the U.S. trade balance during the 1980's. This decline is the result of economic policies which, instead of countervailing the structural factors at work
on U.S. trade, acted instead to accelerate the decline in America's
international position:
U.S. macroeconomic policies produced an overvalued dollar
and high real interest rates, encouraging investment and production abroad relative to the United States;
U.S. trade policies failed to open markets abroad for U.S. exports;
U.S. economic diplomacy failed to support coordinated international actions to improve economic performance among industrial countries, to resolve the Third World debt problem, or
to share more equitably the burden of maintaining international security.
The dollar
The combination of tight money and large budget deficits held
U.S. interest rates substantially above the rates prevailing in other
industrialized countries, creating strong incentives for foreign
wealth-holders to place their assets in the United States (Figure
34).

FIGURE 34
Long-Term Intere Rtes
13 -

UI~d OWNm

12-

10
14%\

The resulting strong demand for dollars raised the value of the
U.S. currency to exceptionally high levels. Taken together, these

i

35
changes produced a radical shift in the exchange value of the
dollar (see Figure 35). Rapid appreciation helped to price U.S. goods
out of world markets, deepening the recession of 1981-1982 for
export-sensitive and import-competing sectors such as agriculture
and manufacturing.
FIGURE 35
THE EXCHANGE VALUE OF THE DOLLAR
W MEW NME

170

150.
140.
130.
120.

1100

Xo
1970:1 197211974:1 1976:1 197t1 19601 198211984:119&1low

In 1981 during a hearing on international economy policy, the
Under Secretary of the Treasury for Monetary Affairs told the JEC
that the administration intended ". . . to pursue a minimal ex-

change intervention policy." Subsequently the overvalued dollar
was welcomed by the administration as a sign of strength, despite
the damage it created to key sectors of the economy. Indeed, until
late 1985, the administration accepted the rise in the dollar and
the concomitant decline in the U.S. foreign trade position of equanimity.
Changes in global capital markets also bid up the dollar, since
they took place at a time when it was clear that the result would
be large capital inflows into the United States in response to relatively high U.S. interest rates. For example:
In 1983 and 1984, the administration negotiated with the Japanese government for liberalization of Japanese capital markets.
While the May 1984 yen-dollar agreement was intended in part to
raise the yen exchange rate by increasing both investment in
Japan and use of the yen in international transactions, its effect
was largely to increase the outflow of long-term capital by Japanese financial institutions.
In July 1984, the U.S. withholding tax on interest paid to foreign
investors was removed, further stimulating the inflow of foreign
capital. Also in July 1984, the Treasury marketed special securities
to be held only by foreigners, a change which made U.S. Treasury
and corporate securities much more attractive to nonresidents.
With the trade deficit at $118 billion and climbing, the United
States reversed policy in 1985 at the September meeting of the
Group of Five and agreed to coordinate policy in an effort to bring

- 36
down the value of the dollar. The Federal Reserve supported the
effort. By late 1986 the dollar had dropped 26 percent from its peak
of early 1985. Yet there has not been clear improvement in the
nominal trade balance. The volume of exports has increased, but so
has import volume and the import share of the U.S. goods market.
In 1986, the United States believed that the dollar's fall had gone
far enough, and Treasury Secretary Baker announced the U.S. intention to stabilize the dollar. During 1987, it is estimated that foreign governments bought $100 billion to $130 billion in dollar
assets, thereby supplying the bulk of the net $160 billion that the
United States borrowed from abroad for the year. Despite this
intervention, from the end of 1986 to the end of 1987, the dollar
lost 22 percent of its value in terms of yen and 19 percent in terms
of German marks.
Failure to change trade structures abroad
Administration policy has generally given low priority to improving opportunities for exports of U.S. goods, focusing instead on
services and investment, which hold out little prospect for substantially improving the U.S. external balance. A review of the major
categories of U.S. exports documents misplaced priorities in trade
negotiation.
Business services. This category runs far below trade in goods. In
1987, the United States had business services exports of $51 billion
and imports of $48 billion, for a net balance of $3 billion. But further improvement in this balance is unlikely, since most business
services (accounting, insurance, legal work, etc.) generally follow
foreign direct investment (FDI). With FDI in the United States increasing more rapidly than FDI by the U.S. abroad, imports of
"business services" into the United States can be expected to rise
more sharply in the future than exports of U.S. "business services."

Investment earnings. This category, often misleadingly included
with business services, no longer presents a significant opportunity
for the United States. With the rapid descent into foreign indebtedness, the United States will remain in deficit in foreign investment
earnings for the foreseeable future. Moreover, to the extent that
the United States may succeed in having restrictions abroad on foreign investment lifted, it may lead to shifting more production out
of the United States and further hurt the U.S. trade balance.
Agriculture. In this category, the United States has managed to
hold on to a modest export surplus but prospects for a substantial
expansion of this surplus under present conditions are not bright.
Major producing countries, such as Canada, Brazil, and Argentina,
expanded their production in-the 1970's to meet growing demand
and today compete with the United States for remaining export
markets. Expanded productive capacity in countries which were
major importers in the 1970's, such as China and India, have made
these countries self-sufficient or net exporters. Low world prices to
date have not resulted in significant reductions in other nations'
productive capacity. Both developed and developing countries see
agricultural production as an important contributor to food security and maintaining balance of payments. The European Community (EC) has expanded its export surpluses through an expensive

37
subsidy program which remains substantial despite U.S. negotiators' efforts to curtail it. Finally, no mechanism has been developed
to turn the human demand represented by the populations of developing countries into effective economic demand for agricultural
products.
Manufactures. This category is the biggest factor in the U.S.
trade imbalance. A $27 billion surplus in 1980 fell to a $138 billion
deficit by 1987. Most trade analysts agree that any prospect of
achieving trade balance in the foreseeable future depends on restoring our trade in manufactured goods. Yet the United States has
accomplished little to improve access for U.S. manufactures exports, even with the fast-growing but relatively closed Asian markets.
Inadequateeconomic diplomacy
Of the serious imbalances confronting the world economy today,
the imbalances in trade among major industrialized countries and
the persisting problem of Third World debt are among the most
significant. As the IMF noted recently:
The large imbalances on external account remain a major
risk in the outlook [for the world economy]. Even though
there is now evidence that the current accounts of the
three largest industrial countries are responding to the exchange rate changes and policy adaptations that have
taken place, on the basis of current policies and exchange
rates the imbalances are nevertheless expected to remain
above sustainable levels after 1988. A major task for economic policy is thus to ensure that the adjustment process
that has been initiated is continued over the medium
term. '
The World Bank noted in its latest report that the persistence of
the Third World debt problem over time has created an unwarranted sense of complacency among policymakers in the industrialized
countries.
The hope that time, policy adjustment by the debtor countries, and support from the global economy would steadily
erode the scale of debt problems has been consistently
frustrated. In terms in which improvement was looked for
most anxiously by creditors and international policymakers-the measure of the debtor countries' creditworthiness-their position has stubbornly failed to improve. In
the five years since 1982, no country involved in rescheduling its debts has significantly reduced its debt ratios. 2
Both of these problems reflect a lack of leadership in the world
economy, a role traditionally played by the United States. While
the United States remains the world's largest single economy, U.S.
policymakers have been slow to recognize that changes in world
markets create new needs for effective coordination among major
economies to deal with major global problems.
' IMF, World Economic Outlook, October 1987, p. 2.
2 World Bank, World Debt Tables: Volume I Analysis and Summary Tables, 1988, p. ix.

38
Internationalpolicy coordination
The "go it alone" attitude was reflected in the approach to the
economic summits, which began in 1975 as annual meetings of the
heads of state of the major industrialized countries to discuss economic concerns. With the advent of floating exchange rates, following abandonment in 1971-1973 of postwar international monetary
arrangements, the summit meetings provided a useful forum for
the coordination of economic policies among the G-7 nations-the
United States, West Germany, France, the United Kingdom, Italy,
Canada, and Japan. In particular the summit process helped the
industrialized countries respond to the economic shocks set off by
the Organization of Petroleum Exporting Countries (OPEC) price
increases of 1973 and 1979.
The administration at first rejected calls for coordinated fiscal
and monetary stimulus to help bring the industrialized countries
out of the 1980-1982 recession, refused to join the other countries
in currency market intervention to lower the dollar's exchange
rate, and opposed any substantive discussion of a multilateral approach to the Third World debt crisis. While the United States has
reconsidered and altered each of these positions, the initial responses have had costs. Prompt and effective coordination of fiscal,
monetary, exchange rate, and Third World debt policies would
have moderated both the 1981-1982 recession-the deepest since
the Depression-and the wide imbalances we face today.
Failure to address the debt crisis in the Third World
The debt crisis surfaced in mid-1982 when Mexico announced
that it could no longer meet its interest payments on debt to foreign banks and governments. Since 1982, faced with rising interest
rates and interest payments rising faster than exports, more than
40 countries have been unable to meet their normal debt service
obligations. In response, the flow of private capital to the debtor
countries has virtually ceased. In 1981 the annual net resource
transfer from the developed countries to the Third World was $35.1
billion. In 1986, however, the net resource transfer was negative by
some $30.6 billion, as the industrialized countries provided $85.7
billion in new loans, but the developing countries were required to
pay back $115.3 billion in interest and principal (see Figure 36).

39

FIGURE 36
NET FINANCIAL TRANSFERS
TO DEVELOPING COUNTRIES
240

-10"0

1651

482

19i3

4U

l@I
60

I

This sudden cutoff of external funding created a crisis for most
heavily indebted Third World countries, who were forced to redirect resources from domestic growth to servicing their outstanding
debt. To generate the trade surpluses required to pay interest on
their debts, they were forced to cut back on imports and boost exports. In most cases imports were cut by scrapping investment
projects and reducing consumption, which usually meant slower
economic growth as well. Gross capital formation in the 15 most
heavily indebted countries-Argentina, Bolivia, Brazil, Chile, Columbia, Ivory Coast, Ecuador, Mexico, Morocco, Nigeria, Peru, Philippines, Uruguay, Venezuela, and Yugoslavia-dropped by 27 percent between 1981 and 1986, while the rate of per capita gross domestic product (GDP) fell by 5 percent (see Figure 37).

40

FIGURE 37
FIrEEN HEAVILY INDEBTED COUNTRIES

so -1

a0

--

so\\.
75

I w

\

ol

n

,

li '

I

s

loin

Im

The damage from these austerity programs was not limited to
the debtor countries. Most of the nations in this group had close
ties to the United States, so that their policies designed to increase
exports while restraining imports had a disproportionately adverse
effect on the United States relative to other industrialized nations.
As Third World imports shrank, export markets for the industrialized countries contracted. U.S. exports to the 15 most heavily indebted countries dropped from $40 billion in 1981 to $30 billion in
1987, and have still not recovered, causing a loss of hundreds of
thousands of American jobs.
The impact on U.S. export of manufactures has been particularly
severe. The 15 most-indebted less developed countries (LDC's) took
18 percent of all U.S. manufactured exports in 1981, and generated
a trade surplus of $20 billion. By 1986, this surplus had dwindled to
a mere $22 million. This $20 billion swing in net trade accounted
for 13 percent of the total deterioration in the United States trade
position in manufactures.
Responding to the debt crisis
The Federal Reserve and the U.S. Treasury organized a $3.5 billion emergency loan package to provide temporary assistance to
Mexico in 1982, and thereafter confined their efforts to keeping the
debt crisis from exploding, rather than developing a comprehensive
long-term solution to the problem. Except for providing several
"bridge" loans on an emerg3ncy basis, and coordinating official
debt rescheduling through the Paris Club, the administration left
to the debtor countries and the banks the much larger problem of
sorting out the debt problem.
In October 1985, while continuing to advocate a case-by-case approach, Treasury Secretary James Baker called for a program of
$29 billion in new lending by the commercial banks and multilateral lending organizations to the 15 most heavily indebted countries
over a three-year period.

41

Notwithstanding the more constructive approach represented by
the Baker Plan, at the end of 1986 the developing countries had external debts amounting to $1 trillion, 90 percent of which was longterm debt owed or guaranteed by their governments. The severity
of the problem is indicated by a continuing rise in the level of external debt and debt service payments relative to GNP and export
revenues (Figure 38).
FIGURE 38
DEVELOPING COUNTRIES DEBT BURDEN

gm
40%-

EMEFAL OME4TSNP

20%-

DEST SERVICE/EXPOWTS
10%-

0%1a 0

19t

1982

1983

198

196

tags

The increasing difficulty of debt servicing since 1982 also shows
up in the substantial increase in the amount of rescheduling of
debt service payments-a record $103 billion in rescheduling
during the first nine months of 1987 (Figure 39). The bleak prospects for several countries to continue meeting their obligations in
the future is reflected in the decline in the price of their debts on
the secondary market (Table 2).

42
FIGURE 39
MU FEfrNXCJWN

is

1960

Them b

FOR OMVBDPM CWNER

1961

1s4
;

aer e

R dt

i

p4j h a wn

gtwn bvme eh bar.

TABLE 2.-SECONDARY MARKET PRICES OF DEVELOPING COUNTRY LOANS
[U.S.
cents
perdollar
ofloanfacevalue]

Country

1986 June
1987 S9e8ter7er
June

Argentina. .......................................................................... ,.......................................... ....................
64.00
Bolivia...................................................................................... ,......................................................... 6.00
Ivgoryioa.6
Brazil ...........................................................................................................................................
4.00
75.00
Chile.............................................................................................................................................
66.00

47.00
9.00
47.00
61.00
69.00

37.00
9.00
37.00
39.00
58.00

Iv uaory
Coast...................................................................................................................................
Ecuadro.........................................................................................................................................

62.00
49.00

60.00
33.00

74.00
63.50

Nigeria .......................... ,..........,..................................................................,..........................
55.00
Philippines ....................................................................................................................................
59.00
Turkey ..........................................................................................................................................
97.50
Venezuela
............................. ,.........:........ ............................................................................... 7.00......7 .00 .
Yugoslavia....................................................................................................................................
79.00
l

.29.00
25.00
69.00
59.00
97.00
96.50
. 70.00
.. .. . . 53.00
..
75.00
60.00

Bidprices.

Source:
Salomon
Brothers,
Inc.,NewYork,NY.

With the debt crisis well into its sixth year, the global financial
system is still at risk from widespread defaults that could be initiated by a slowdown in world trade, rising interest rates, or any of a
number of other adverse changes in the global economy.
Although the administration has been slow to recognize this new
reality, there have been encouraging signs of progress in recent

months, including administration willingness to support a proposal
for reducing Mexico's outstanding bank debt which involved replacing existing debt with a lesser amount of bonds whose principal
was backed by a special issue of U.S. Treasury debt securities. The
very modest response which this plan has received from the commercial banking system suggests broader and more comprehensive

43
solutions for reducing and restructuring the debt of a number of
heavily indebted countries may be necessary.
The outline for a more comprehensive approach to the international debt problem has been included in both the House and
Senate versions of the trade bill. The congressional approach would
involve international negotiations to establish an intermediary
debt facility to purchase debt at a discount from the commercial
banks and pass the value of the discount along to the borrower in
the form of lowered repayment obligations.
In concept, this proposal has much in common with the Mexican
debt relief plan supported by the Treasury, but it provides a more
comprehensive solution, with a broader base and wider applicability than the Mexican proposal. The congressional approach would
link debt reduction to policy reform in the debtor countries, and
would call upon countries with large current account surpluses
such as Japan and West Germany to play a major role. Proposals
very similar to the congressional one are being brought forth with
increasing frequency from a number of quarters. The African Development Bank has recently endorsed the creation of an intermediary to purchase and manage the debt of heavily indebted African
countries, while the head of a major U.S. financial institution has
set out a detailed plan for a multilateral debt intermediary.
Unequal defense burden sharing
U.S. financial contributions to mutual Western defense exceed
the contributions of our allies and are, by commonly used measures, disproportionate to relative economic strengths. There is a
growing view in the United States that we carry too large a share
of the burden of the Western alliance. Significant changes have occurred in the economies of the allied countries since security arrangements were established. Yet the United States continues to
shoulder defense responsibilities that were set at a time when U.S.
allies were in a weakened state economically. The issue is not the
importance of the North Atlantic Treaty Organization (NATO) alliance and the alliance with Japan to the United States, but rather
the amounts alliance members spend for mutual security, and
whether the burden of defense is shared equitably.
Relative defense spending
The United States, with the largest economy, spends significantly
more for defense than any or our allies. This is true not only in
absolute terms (obviously to be expected) but also in relative terms.
U.S. defense spending as a share of GDP in 1986 (the most recent
year for which data are available for all countries) was 6.7 percent,
compared to about 3.5 percent for NATO Europe and L.0 percent
for Japan. For the largest European countries, the shares of GDP
were 3.9 percent in France, 3.1 percent in West Germany, and 5.0
percent in the United Kingdom.
The disparity of contributions is greater when defense spending
is compared on a per capita basis. The United States spent $1,155
for defense per capita in 1986. Per capita defense spending for
NATO Europe was $318 (weighted average) and for Japan was
$163. Table 3 show defense spending as a share of GDP and per
capita for the United States and our allies in 1986 The 1987 De-

44
partment of Defense (DOD) report on burden sharing contains indicators of each allied country's ability to contribute. For example,
the U.S. economy accounts for 48 percent of the GDP of all the
NATO countries plus Japan, but the United States contributes 70
percent of the defense spending of all those countries. The United
States contains 32 percent of the population of the NATO countries
plus Japan, but contributes 40 percent of the active defense manpower of all those countries. In part, these disproportions are a
result of the U.S. military buildup in the 1980's. The sharp increases in U.S. defense spending during this period widened the differences with our allies. However, the pattern has been generally
the same for decades. Table 4 shows defense expenditures as a percentage of GDP for the United States, NATO, and Japan since
1955. The relative contributions by this measure have been remarkably constant throughout the period. The U.S. share has
always been about twice as large as NATO Europe, and Japan has
always been at about 1 percent.
TABLE 3-1986 DEFENSE EXPENDITURES AS A PERCENTAGE OF GDP AND PER CAPITA
dollars]
[In U.S.
ofGDP
Percent

Country

Percapita

6.7

$1,155

Netherlands.............................................................................................................................
Norway....................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
Portugal
Spain.......................................................................................................................................
Turkey.....................................................................................................................................
Kingdom.......................................................................................................................
United

3.0
2.2
2.0
3.9
3.1
6.1
2.2
9
3.1
3.1
3.2
2.0
4.8
5.0

346
308
322
511
453
232
235
145
365
519
90
113
53
488

weighted average.......................................................................................
NATO
Non-U.S.
...............................................................................................................................................
Japan

3.3
1.0

318
163

United
States...................................................................................................................
allies:
NATO
...................................................................................................................................
Belgium
Canada....................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................
Denmark
France.....................................................................................................................................
Germany..................................................................................................................................
Greece.....................................................................................................................................
Italy....................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................
Luxembourg

TABLE 4.-1986 DEFENSE EXPENDITURES AS A PERCENTAGE OF GDP, UNITED STATES, NATO, AND
JAPAN 1955-86
1955

Country
.................................
UnitedStates
..
average..
NATO
Non-U.N.
Japan..

.

.
.

.

.

1960

1965

1970

1975

1980

1986

6.7
5.1
6.0
7.7
7.4
8.9
10.0
3.3
3.0
3.2
3.8
3.1
4.1
....................................................
. 4.5
1.0
.9
.8 1.1 .9
.9
.0
..................................................................................

Allied contributions
These facts are not presented- to minimize - allied contributions,
which are very substantial and form a vital part of Western alliance mutural defense. In addition, our allies argue with some justi-

45

fication that their contributions are not fully captured in the quantified measures most often used. The use of conscription in West
Germany and most other countries reduces defense spending because conscripts are paid below-market wages. Europeans maintain
that as a result European manpower is more cost effective, and
there is a larger trained reserve manpower pool than there would
be with an all-volunteer force. West German contributions to the
maintenance of troops in Berlin, and the land and facilities made
available free by West Germany and other host countries to U.S.
overseas forces are also not included in quantified measures. There
are also the social and psychological costs that flow from the use of
one's territory by alliance forces. Military exercises sometimes
result in accidental deaths and damage to property.
Further, our allies point out that their expeditures for economic
development assistance for the poorer nations are greater collectively than U.S. expenditures, and most of them make contributions which are substantially greater as a share of GDP than for
the United States (see Table 5). The figures for development assistance contained in the recent DOD report on burden sharing and in
reports of the Organization for Economic Cooperation and Development (OECD) confirm that U.S. spending as a proportion of GPD is
less than half that of France and West Germany, and below that of
Japan, the United Kingdom, and several other European countries.
Nevertheless, these factors do not change the basic facts about
burden sharing, since expenditures for foreign economic aid are
relatively small. The second column in Table 5 shows economic assistance as a percentage of GDP among the NATO countries. In
most countries, the share is less than 1 percent and for all the nonU.S. NATO countries the weighted average is 0.5 percent. The
United States, West Germany, the United Kingdom, and Japan all
fall below the average, with the United States the lowest at 0.2 percent.
TABLE 5.-DEFENSE AND ECONOMIC ASSISTANCE COMBINED, INPERCENTAGES OF GDP, 1986
Country
UnitedStates
......................................

DefesoEconomic Combined

expendituresassistance efo andiUrS
6.7

0.2

7.0

100

NATO
allies:
Belgium...........................................................................................
3.0
0.5
3.4
49
Canada............................................................................................
2.2
.5
2.7
39
Denmark.........................................................................................
2.0
.9
2.8
41
France..
........................
. .............................
3.9
.7
4.6....................................
6
66
Germany..
........................................................................................
3.1
.4
3.5
51
Greece.............................................................................................
6...
.
.....................6.1
87
Italy..
..............................................................................................
2.2
.4
2.6
38
Luxembourg....................................................................................
.9 ........................
.9
14
Netherlands...............................................
......................................
3.1
1.0
4.1
59
Norway..
..........................................................................................
3.1
1.1
4.3
61
Portugal..........................................................................................
3...
.
.....................3.2
46
Spain...............................................................................................
2...
.
.....................
2.0 28
Turkey.............................................................................................
4...
.
.....................4.8
69
UnitedKingdom
.......................................
5.0
.3
5.3
76
Non-U.S.
NATO
weighted average...............................................
Japan
.......................................
Source.
ongressmal
Budget
Office.

3.3
1.0

.5
.3

3.7
1.3

54
19

46
According to estimates of the CBO, taking account of the costs of
conscription, the value of land made available to foreign troops,
and contributions to forces in Berlin increase West German defense
spending as a share of GDP from 3.1 to 3.7 percent. Adjustments
for other countries would be even less significant. By the same
token, adding foreign economic assistance to defense spending figures does not make a major difference because economic aid is so
small compared to defense spending. Table 5 shows the effects of
combining the two types of expenditures in percentages of GDP.
Japan's relatively low level of defense spending is a consequence
of the understanding following World War II that it would not use
military force as an instrument of national policy. The 1 percent of
GNP ceiling was adopted by the government in the mid-1960's and
reaffirmed in 1976. In the late 1970's, Japan agreed to assume the
costs of improving facilities for U.S. forces and a larger portion of
the expenses of Japanese employed by U.S. forces at the total cost
of $770 million. Last year, Japan also announced a new policy of
basing future defense spending on a determination of need rather
than on a limited percent of GNP. It is doubtful, however, that
Japan's defense spending will substantially exceed 1 percent of
GNP in the foreseeable future.
As shown above, our major trading partners spend much less for
defense than we do. In addition to efforts to close the gap there are
other ways in which they can contribute to the security interests of
the Western Alliance. A balanced approach to Western security requires greater attention to the needs of the international economy.
Japan and West Germany, very strong trade surplus countries, are
in a position to make larger contributions to world economic
growth. They could add significantly to Western security by joining
in efforts to address the problems of development assistance and
Third World debt.
THE LONG-TERM CONSEQUENCES: AMERICA AS A DEBTOR NATION

The factors outlined above help to explain the rapid deterioration in America's trade account during the 1980's. By itself, this deterioration is a serious problem for American producers, but much
of its long-run significance as a problem for the U.S. economy
comes from the fact that the growing trade deficits have been financed by borrowing from abroad at an extraordinary rate.
Consistent with its position as the world's strongest industrial
nation, the United States generally maintained trade surpluses or
balance between World War I and the mid-1970's. During the latter
half of the 1970's, the country continued to run a surplus on current account, despite the appearance of deficits in the merchandise
trade account. Earnings from overseas investments more than compensated for the merchandise trade deficits.
As a result of these current account surpluses, the United States
by 1981 had built up assets abroad officially estimated at $140 billion more than assets held by foreigners in the United States. By
the end of 1987, the U.S. net asset position had deteriorated by
roughly $543 billion, leaving a foreign debt of approximately $402
billion (Figure 40).

47
FIGURE 40

Net Asset Position of the United States
Ellons of Dollars Y

rnd

1980 1981 1982 1963 1964 1965 1986 1967

Proponents of current policies have offered several interpretations of the unprecedented swing: (1) that official figures overstate
the extent of our net indebtedness; (2) that foreign asset holdings
consist of equity investments as well as debt investments, and the
equity portion is a vote of confidence in America by foreign investors; (3) that foreign borrowings have been used to strengthen U.S.
investment and thus contribute to the strength of the economy in
the future; and (4) that our current foreign debt is small relative to
our GNP and ability to service the debt through exports.
Do official figures overstate net indebtedness? While there is
some validity to the argument that official estimates undervalue
U.S. equity investment abroad, these same undervaluations would
apply to prior years when we were a net creditor nation. Thus
while the absolute size of the U.S. net debt may be open to question, the amount of deterioration in that position and the shift
from creditor to debtor status is not. We are on a path which will
result in the accumulation of hundreds of billions of dollars of additional foreign claims against future income.

48
Does foreign lending indicate confidence in the Nation's future?
Equating the Nation's deteriorating net external asset position
with a company selling stock to finance its growth rests on a misperception of the allocation of foreign asset holdings in the United
States. As Figure 41 shows, foreign investment in the United
States is increasingly and overwhelmingly concentrated in debt instruments, not equity or direct investment.
In addition, for more than a year debt funds flowing into the
United States have come primarily from foreign governments
hoping to stave off adverse financial and exchange-rate repercussions of insufficient private lending, not from private investors.
Since the October 19 drop in the stock market, foreigners have actually become net sellers of stock on U.S. exchanges. In the fourth
quarter of 1987, foreign investors were net sellers of U.S. corporate
equities by a record $7.2 billion, following a rise of $5 billion in the
third quarter.
Does foreign lending help sustain investment? Foreign investment has helped to finance both investment and consumption in
the United States, if not directly in the form of equity investments
or consumer loans, then indirectly, by reducing pressure on domestic savings to finance the entire range of business and consumer
borrowing. Whether investment in the United States has remained
higher than would otherwise have been the case over the past
seven years as a result of foreign capital inflow is doubtful, since
fiscal deficits might well have been reduced in the absense of foreign borrowing. In any case, as noted earlier, foreign borrowing has
not been used to increase the overall rate of investment relative to
consumption.

49

FIGURE 41
Fornsig,
MAt In the Unied St..
In Billans d U.& Dcana

1970

27 Equilly
Dw

!

>b

2

1988

a~~~~~~Eut (12.5%

DOM 71^5

As noted elsewhere in this Report, net investment as a share of
net national product in the United States has declined during the
1980's, at tthe same time that foreign borrowing increased. Last
year, net foreign borrowing was significantly larger than net capital investment in the American economy, meaning that foreign
claims on furutre output increased faster than the capital base
which will be needed to generate the future output. This pattern
cannot be considered a blueprint for stengthening the American
economy in the future.
Is the debt obligation small relative to GNP? While the United
States has a smaller external debt relative to GNP than countries
such as Canada and Australia, this is no cause for complacency.
The United States decline into debtor status has taken place at a
stunning pace, and the debt will continue to grow for the foreseeable future.
Finally, the question also does not take into account the potential future costs of the obligation. Concern about external indebtedness arises not only from the annual servicing costs on the old
debt, but also from the annual borrowing requirements created by

50
this debt. The United States already must borrow substantial sums
simply to cover its deficit in merchandise trade. As long as merchandise trade is in deficit, the United States will need to borrow
additional sums to cover the interest payments on its current foreign debt obligations. As our net indebtedness increases, interest
payments to foreigners will add to the annual external deficit, thus
increasing future foreign borrowing requirements.
Each year the current account balance is negative, the United
States will add to its net external debt by the amount of the deficit.
Even optimistic projections for the trade deficit assume current account deficits well into the 1990's, with a corresponding rise in the
net external deficit and net interest payments each year. The external debt will continue to rise significantly over the next several
years, and create the need for a significant merchandise trade surplus to balance the growing deficit on interest payments. The fact
that the United States has not posted a surplus on merchandise
trade since 1975 suggests the magnitude of the required turnaround.
The external debt also limits our ability to manage the economy
over the intermediate term, and reduces our influence in international affairs. As a substantial debtor in need of further credit, the
United States cannot be indifferent to the views of external creditors when formulating economic or other policies.
VI. THE LEGACY OF EXPERIMENT: DOMESTIC IMBALANCES
A fundamental legacy of the 1980's is the buildup of extraordinary macroeconomic imbalances which distort the U.S. domestic
economy and strain the international trading system. These imbalances reflect a macroeconomic policy which has engaged in massive
borrowing from both internal and external sources. They are not
sustainable, however, and to a significant degree the process of correction will define the course of the Nation's economic policy for
the remainder of the century.
The effect of simultaneous application in the early 1980's of
strong fiscal stimulus and monetary restraint was to produce economic performance slightly below average, according to aggregate
measures, and at the same time to cause substantial shifts in the
pattern of economic activity. These shifts are especially evident
with respect to manufacturing and agriculture.
Several trends have contributed to a pattern of growing sectoral
imbalance, including the overvalued dollar and the soaring trade
deficit, which seriously damaged the traded-goods sector of the
economy while stimulating the non-traded goods sector; and the
huge fiscal stimulus concentrated heavily in the defense sector,
which contributed disproportionately to defense-related industries.
MANUFACTURING

The sector most seriously affected by the monetary-fiscal policy
mix have been trade-sensitive industries with high fixed costs.
Companies in these industries (principally manufacturing) were
priced out of foreign and domestic markets in the early 1980's by
the overvalued U.S. dollar and found it difficult to raise productivi-

51

ty through new investment because of the unusually high and persistent real interest rates in this country.
Defenders of current economic policy point to statistical showing
that manufacturing has not declined as a share of U.S. output
over
the decade of the 1980's as a way of proving that the trade deficit
has not had a particularly adverse impact on this sector of
the
American economy. But Figure 42 demonstrates that this argument misses the point. Manufacturing output as a share of U.S.
production of goods has remained relatively constant, but U.S.
spending on goods has risen during the 1 980's. As a result,
share of goods purchased by U.S. consumers which are made the
by
TT.S. producers has declined markedly during the period.
FIGURE 42
SHARE OF GOODS INU.S.
PRODUCTION AND SPENDING
49%
48%
47%

45%44%

f

43%

42%
41%
1947:4

lU=4

15:4

1984

1967:4

19M4

1977:

19M4

197:4

These pressures adversely affected both profitability and
investment in the manufacturing sector. Figure 43 shows the new
declining rates of return in manufacturing, measured both in terms
of
return on sales and return on assets. Given the low rates of return,
the sharp fall off in the rate of growth in the net capital stock
manufacturing appears to reflect a natural market reaction to in
low
profitability in this sector (Figure 44).

52
FIGURE 43
RATES OF RETURN IN MANUFACTURING

4.0%
3.0%
2.0%-

0.0%
74Z375

7:377:.3 78.37it3

8.381:3
Si:3SZ.3

843
85:
M3 OS a7:

The deceleration of capital stock growth in manufacturin~g is
among the most troubling legacies of the recent international imbalances. In comparison with other industrialized countries, the
United States has for many years had a lower rate of investment.
Figure 45 compares gross fixed capital information as a share of
GNP for the United States, Japan, West Germany, and the United
-Kingdom, a comparison which shows the poor relative performance
of the United States. Since the data are in gross terms, they do not
capture the significant decline in net investment in the United
States during the most recent period. The fact that the United
States has remained weak in gross investment raises concerns
about the ability of the American economy to compete in world
markets in the future.

53
FIGURE 44
THE NET CAPITAL STOCK IN MANUFACTURING

Despite the sharp falloff in investment, productivity growth' is
sometimes cited as evidence that the pressures created by the overvalued dollar and the trade deficit have had a salutary effect on
the organization and efficiency of American manufacturing. While
there has been substantial productivity growth in manufacturing,
available data suggest that much of this improvement may have
come primarily from closing older and less efficient plants rather
than building new, modern, internationally competitive ones. This
has adverse implications if export capacity is to keep pace with
export expansion opportunities resulting from a more competitive
dollar. Data on manufacturing capacity (i.e., maximum output possible from the existing factory base) which are collected by the Federal Reserve Board show that the rate of expansion of capacity in
U.S. manufacturing hit a 30-year low in 1984, and has recovered
only slightly in the years since (Figure 46).

54
FIGURE 45
REAL FXED CAPITAL FORMATION
AS A SHAPE OF REAL GDP
AM

.-

3% -

/
U.I W. Gulmwpy

.

.

24%
.,.^

1.

w~~~~~~~~~~~~~~US

16% -----

1971:4

1973:4

¶975:4

1977:4

1979.4

1981:4

.

193:4

1

4

19 7:4

FIGURE 46
GROWTH IN MANUFACTURING CAPACITY
Poem

Ctarge frum a Yew Ago

This is consistent with evidence that American manufacturing
firms are reluctant to expand investment in line with rising production, a historical relationship that has not been maintained in
the recent recovery (Figure 47). This too raises the question of capacity constraints, given extremely tight capacity-utilization ratios
in a number of major industries, and risks a rise in inflation if demands holds up.

55
FIGURE 47
OUTPUT AND INVESTMENT IN MANUFACTURING

$St.

~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~

SW
-

1S.4

O

1972

1

tndwut

Pmduclon hdex

1S73:4

Igo=

19

.

AGRICULTURE

American agriculture traditionally has been one of the most productive sectors of the economy. Research, improved technology, and
farmers' investments have led to steadily rising productivity.
Today, less than 3 percent of the U.S. population can feed not only
the rest of the Nation but millions of people throughout the world.
At the same time, the share of income that Americans spend on
food has been the lowest in the world, and agricultural exports
have contributed positively to America's trade balance.
In the 1980's, the American farm sector has faced a major financial crisis, the worst in more than half a century. This crisis forced
thousands of farmers to leave the land, reduced the agricultural
capital stock, and caused a major drop in the value of farmland. It
spread to rural communities and to farm lenders, as the farm population fell by 14 percent from 1980 to 1986. Agriculture's trade
surplus plummeted, adding to the Nation's trade deficit.
Figure 48 shows annual changes in farm asset values. From a
peak of $1,104 billion in 1981, farm asset values fell 26 percent by
1986. This decline, comparable in percentage terms to the October
1987 stock market break, largely represents a loss of farmers'

equity. Between 1981 and 1986, farmers' real wealth declined to the
levels of 20 years earlier.

56
FIGURE 48
Annual Change In the Value of Farm Meet
_Aatud OfDm"
.
-

-U

10 0*
-40.
*0*
.40.
40
*70.
-Go.
40
.100.
tI 6

t

til

tOk

1563

1U4

1to5

lOSS

1l57

Farmland values fell by more than 33 percent between 1982 and
1986. In this period, the U.S. Department of Agriculture (USDA)
reports that three states had declines exceeding 50 percent, while
10 other states experienced declines of over 40 percent (Figure 49).
FIGURE 49
PERCENT CHANGE IN FARMLAND VALUE
February 1982 - February 1987

Lsa
4

m LOW=
r

0

In states where land value increased, nonfarm demands for rural
land were very strong. While farm debts declined during the

57
1980's, much of the drop reflects lender foreclosures, defaults, and
more restrictive conditions for new credit.
Causes of the financial crisis
While a number of factors contributed to the reversal of farm financial conditions in the 1980's, high interest rates resulting from
administration macroeconomic policies were fundamental. Hig'-. interest rates in the early 1980's contributed to global recession,
choking off demand for agricultural exports and making interest
payments the single largest component of farmers' payments for
crop and livestock production.
More important, high interest rates helped push the dollar up,
effectively pricing the United States out of world markets. In 1981,
agricultural exports accounted for 28 percent of farm cash receipts,
but by 1986 they accounted for less than 19 percent. Figure 50,
showing export levels of three major agricultural export products
and the exchange value of the dollar, makes clear the consequences
of the higher dollar for farm exports.
FIGURE 50
AGRICULTURAL EXPORTS AND THE DOLLAR
E

ih U

of Toensu

150
240 -

Scale

1rlngt
140

130

2C0 -

\

.
/
200~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~9

20

~~~~~~~~~~~~~110

\

121)~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~1

40

107J

Iff
d

Lo
Feud Gam

1

199
Whea l

GM SS

195

197

°

Import barriers of other nations also contributed to the crisis of
U.S. agriculture. While the United States clearly has a comparative advantage to these countries in agricultural production, other
nations' domestic policies block U.S. exports. Two examples underscore the significance of these policies.
The European Community. Prior to this decade, the EC was a
major importer of U.S. agricultural products. After 1982, farm exports to the EC plunged (Figure 51). Import barriers and high internal prices have encouraged agricultural production in the EC. For
some commodities, these barriers have raised production so much
that the EC now competes with the United States for export markets in them. As a result, the citizens of the EC pay an ever-increasing cost for growing inventories of agricultural products that

58
must then be sold on world markets, depressing prices for other,
more efficient producers.
FIGURE 51
U.S. AGRICULTURAL EXPORTS TO THE EC.
13y-12
12

Japan. Japan, which is not self-sufficient in food production, is
the largest importer of agricultural products from the United
States. However, restrictions on beef, tobacco, citrus, and rice raise
food prices for Japanese consumers and cost American farmers
export sales. The Japanese attempt to block the importation of
products if they can be produced domestically, thereby maximizing
the value of domestic farm production-for example Japan allows
imports of feed grains for livestock but restricts livestock imports.
The Third World debt crisis affected agricultural exports in at
least two ways. Many developing countries, like Mexico and Nigeria, had been significant importers of American agricultural products but faced heavy debt service obligations. As a consequence,
they significantly reduced their food and other imports. Although
U.S. food aid has increased modestly, it has not offset the lost sales.
In addition, debtor countries with significant agricultural potential,
like Brazil and Argentina, expanded production both to reduce
their dependence on foreign supply and to generate through exports income needed to meet their external obligations.
Effects on farmers

According to measures of financial stress developed by the Federal Reserve, the percentage of commercial farmers in severe financial difficulty declined from 17 percent in 1985 to 12 percent in
January 1987. The drop over three years reflects steadily growing
indebtedness and failure rather than farms returning to financial
health. The decreasing numbers of farmers indicate that it is difficult for farmers to recover once they weaken financially. Roughly a
third of the farm operators at the beginning of the 1980's have
either seen their farm in jeopardy or lost it. Even those still in rea-

59
sonable financial condition have seen their equity significantly
eroded.
Though overall losses in agriculture are severe, USDA data suggest that certain groups and regions have borne a disproportionate
share of these losses. Families who took on large initial amounts of
debt in the 1970's when land was expensive have suffered most, as
have farmers in the central and southeastern regions of the country. Cash crop farms, including producers of wheat, corn, soybeans,
and other grains, have the greatest number of farms in financial
difficulty. Notably this type of farm is most dependent on export
sales.
Individuals wishing to become farmers now face increased difficulties, given farming's requirement of stable long-term financing.
Though land prices have fallen, it has become harder to obtain financing for farm purchases. Lenders now require higher down payments and impose more stringent repayment terms than previously. In the absence of affordable financing, farm ownership may
soon become the prerogative of the wealthy.
The depressed state of agriculture has led farmers to cut back on
investment in equipment. Table 6 shows that net farm investment
has been negative since 1981. The resulting drop in the capital
stock and increasingly obsolete technology reduces American agriculture's ability to compete in global markets and could mean
higher domestic food prices.
Impacts beyond the farm gate
The farm crisis has severely affected communities serving farm
families. With growing inventories and reduced production, farmers have shipped a smaller volume of output and reduced purchases of fertilizer, chemicals, and equipment thereby reducing
local business sales. The decline in farm asset values reduced the
tax base of many rural communities at the same time that they
faced increased demands for social services. Limited revenues in
rural communities have also resulted in decaying physical infrastructure, particularly roads and bridges, which are vital to the
movement of agricultural commodities.
TABLE 6.-CAPITAL FORMATION INU.S. AGRICULTURE, 1975-86 EXCLUDING HOUSEHOLDS
[In millions
ofdollars]
Year
1975 ..................................................
1976 ..................................................
1977 ..................................................
1978
..................................................
1979 ..................................................
1980 ..................................................
1981 ..................................................
1982 ..................................................
1983 ..................................................
1984 ..................................................
1985 ..................................................
1986 ..................................................

84-405 0 - 88 - 3

Gross
investment Depreciation Netimvestment
$12,384
13,968
15,015
17,948
20,075
17,982
16,846
13,261
12,738
12,521
9,615
8,559

$10,604
11,794
13,166
14,348
16,297
17,847
19,612
20,148
19,918
19,213
17,427
15,849

$1,780
2,174
1,849
3,600
3,778
135
-2,766
-6,887
-7,180
-6,692
-7,812
-7,290

60
The decline of domestic farm investment as well as the overvalued dollar caused many manufacturers of farm equipment to
become unprofitable, to cease operation, or to be bought out. According to the Commerce Department, there are only two major
tractor manufacturers left in the United States, down from 7 in
1982, and 85 percent of the tractors sold domestically are currently
imported.
Lenders to farmers have been severely hurt since 1981 and will
continue to experience significant losses in the future. As noted in
the Committee's Report last year, the Farm Credit System lost over
$4.6 billion in 1985 and 1986 and saw its loan volume decline by
over $1 billion a month (Figures 52 and 53). The rapid rise and subsequent fall of interest rates in the early 1980's also devastated the
FCS since it borrowed short and lent long. The FCS required congressional action in three consecutive years, with the most recent
legislation authorizing up to a $4 billion capital infusion to provide
the FCS with resources necessary to absorb its losses.

61
FIGURE 52
Fam Credit Sytems Loans Outstanding

so *

I

70.

so.go0.
40

I

30

20.
10*
-

FIGURE 53
FARM CREDIT SYSTEM, ANNUAL INCOME
MXONS OF OOuAIt

S1.5
1.0
0.
0

1

o0.5
-1.0
-l.a
-2.0
2-25

19o

1961

1962

1963

1984

1965

196

1967

Other lenders, notably life insurance companies and the Farmers
Home Administration, have also experienced significant losses. In
addition, numerous commercial banks have failed over the last five
years and many remain in a precarious position (Table 7). The
weakening of the credit infrastructure serving agriculture could
prove to be a limiting factor in the economic recovery of the sector.
Agriculturalexports
Rebuilding exports is vital to the recovery of agriculture and an
important element in dealing with the Nation's trade deficit. Con-

62
gress has recognized that older export programs, such as Pub. L.
480 and export credit, needed to be supplemented to regain market
share and established the Export Enhancement Program. A Presidential Assistant for Agricultural Trade and Food Aid to coordinate efforts to expand exports has also been authorized, as have
new aid and trade missions.
TABLE 7.-BANK FAILURES
All banks Agrkultural agriltral

Year

banks

1

7
35
44
78
118
144
202

1981
........................................................
1982 .......................................................
1983 .......................................................
1984 .......................................................
1985 ........................................................
1986 .......................................................
1987
........................................................

11
7
31
69
66
75

14
31
16
40
59
46
37

Although the dollar's decline began in early 1985, agricultural
exports did not show significant recovery for two years. The agricultural trade balance continued to decline in 1985 despite lower
market prices for major commodities (Figure 54), and for three
months in that year (May, June, and July), the United States actually experienced a deficit in agricultural trade. Exports continued
to fall through 1986, despite still lower commodity prices, a decline
in interest rates, and a fall in energy prices. Although participation
in government programs to limit output increased, weak markets
caused inventories to swell, primarily in Federal warehouses.
FIGURE 54
U.S. ACricuftural Trade

~~~_"

\

d Om"l
-

$48

/

40 -

X is"/ He'd""\''~~/

-20-

,-

30

1970

1972

1974

/

1978

1978

/........

1960

lO11

194

is

67

The 1985-1987 lag in agricultural trade reflected problems faced
by many U.S. commodity exporters. The dollar declined significant-

63
ly against the Japanese yen and the German mark after 1985 but
brought little response in exports. Lower exchange rates with
Europe and Japan did not significantly expand exports to these
countries because of their import quotas and other restrictive trade
practices. The EC has also continued its export subsidies, despite
their growing cost.
It is important to note that the dollar did not fall significantly
against the currencies of other agricultural exporters, so the relative price of American farm products did not decline. As a result of
debt problems and managed exchange rates, major Third World exporters, particularly Brazil and Argentina, kept their exports competitive. This limited the ability of U.S. farmers to capture additional markets.
Expanding agricultural exports in the future will require recognition that the terms of trade have changed since the 1970's. Countries that traditionally imported agricultural products have developed domestic agricultural capacity and in some cases-are now exporters. Other countries, which have always exported, also expanded their capacity and seek to maintain exports to service their
debts. With such new investments in place, this added capacity will
likely remain in competition with U.S. agriculture for some time.
The fragility of the recovery
The upturn in farmland prices of the last year has been interpreted as an indication that the agriculture crisis is over. However,
the farm recovery has been fueled by government programs. Fully
38 percent of net farm income came from direct government payments in 1987, as opposed to 5 percent in 1979 (Figure 55).
FIGURE 55
Govemment's Contribution to Farm Inoome
(MawL ftd Piymwas
a Prwe of NoaPim
Fwm

USDA forecasts increased production expenses in 1988, while the
level of government payments are expected to decline. Together,
these imply lower net farm income. Any increase in interest rates
or energy costs could also lower farm income.

64
Exports will have to continue to grow if the farm recovery is to
be sustained. Export programs are estimated to have helped sell 20
million tons of grain in 1987, but increased export demand will be
required to offset forecast reductions in government payments, including export promotion payments. At the same time that capacity grew in other countries, the United States let its capacity deteriorate by failing to replace depreciating capital. This suggests
that, although the United States has a comparative advantage in
agricultural production, it may be difficult nonetheless to achieve a
rapid major expansion in exports.
At the end of the 1980's, the United States lacks much of the
human and physical capital essential to maintain the traditional
high productivity of American agriculture, and face the challenge
of revitalizing export markets. Current levels of government support have provided breathing space for agriculture, but they do not
constitute a long-term solution.
The full cost to U.S. agriculture of the last six years has not yet
been totaled, and the legacy of the last half decade will be with us
for some time. The imperatives facing farm policy are:
Rebuilding export markets to assure that the farm sector
can maintain its contribution to GNP and the Nation's balance
of trade,
Ensuring that excessive high costs of credit do not preclude
qualified entrants from having the chance to own a farm,
Replacing that portion of agriculture's capital stock that is
obsolete, allowing American agriculture to maintain its historic rate of productivity and technological advance, and
Revitalizing rural infrastructure and providing the level of
services farmers require for the efficient production and distribution of agricultural products.
CIVILIAN/MILITARY

A major impact on economic policy during the 1980's was the
rapid expansion in military spending. A review of prior defense
spending trends will help put the recent buildup in perspective.
From 1956 to the beginning of the 1980's, real defense spending
was relatively stable, except for the period of the Vietnam War
when it peaked. In the peacetime years of this period, real defense
outlays in 1989 dollars averaged roughly $240 billion. In 1981-1988,
real defense outlays averaged $271 billion per year. Outlays in FY
89 are estimated at $294 billion (see Figure 56).

65

FIGURE 56
National Defense Budget Authoray and Oudays
_

520

d FPY
INS Oell

270 -

31021020 VO

se

PR

su oo

Ad

toY

The trend in level of defense spending is sometimes contrasted
with the trend in defense spending as a share of GNP. It is estimated that the defense share of GNP in 1989 will be 6.2 percent, an
increase of roughly 25 percent since 1980, when the defense share
of GNP was 5 percent. This is lower than the 1956-1965 peacetime
period following the Korean War when it was 9.5 percent, but.
higher than the 5.1 percent of the 1975-1979 post-Vietnam period.
What must be kept in mind, however, is that the trends for spending and shares of GNP may diverge, depending on the rate of
growth of the economy, and whether there is a recession or negative growth.
Even the steep growth rate of defense spending in 1981-1985 was
below that originally intended by the administration. If Congress
had not trimmed back budget proposals, defense spending in 1989
would be approximately $446 billion, or $152 billion more than actually will be spent. Financing the additional defense spending
would have required a further shift in budget priorities than occurred.
The rapid growth in defense helped contribute to sectoral inequality in two ways. First, military spending growth was not
matched by equivalent revenue increases, and this was a principal
cause of the rapidly rising Federal deficits which put upward pressure on both the dollar and interest rates. While the defense sector
was largely insulated from the effects of both high interest rates
and an overvalued dollar, other manufacturing industries were not.
Thus the mechanism of funding the military buildup helped to
widen growth disparities between defense and nondefense industries.
Second, by virtually any indicator chosen, the distribution of
military outlays and hence the direct employment and income benefits are highly concentrated. The bulk of these contracts have

66
gone to a relatively small number of companies, which have a
small number of locations for research and production activities.
Employment opportunities are also created in a relatively narrow
range of occupations and industries. The amount of subcontracts
awarded by prime contractors to their suppliers alters the pattern
somewhat but does not fundamentally change the high degree of
concentration in defense contracting.
The goal of balanced economic development has been further undermined by the rapid buildup of defense research and development (R&D), a subject discussed in detail in a later section of this
report. Defense R&D rose faster since 1980 than any other portion
of the defense program. In 1987, it accounted for 12.7 percent of the
DOD budget compared to 9.6 percent in 1980. However, as defense
R&D has tilted toward advanced development of new weapons systems, spending to maintain the defense technology base has steadily declined from 15 percent of overall defense R&D expenditures
in 1980 to 8 percent in the FY89 budget request.
VII.

THE LEGACY OF EXPERIMENT: INCOME STAGNATION AND
INEQUALITY

On average, income growth has declerated markedly since the
mid-1970's, whlle income distribution has become steadily more unequal. Policies designed to accelerate income growth during the
1980's have largely failed, while other policies have actively fostered the growing inequality of income. Restoring income growth,
and improving income distribution, constitute serious challenges to
future economic policy in this country.
TRENDS IN THE GROWTH AND DISTRIBUTION OF INCOME

The following charts tell the story of personal income in America
by comparing actual growth in real income per capita with the
growth trend established during the period 1947 to 1980. The
graphs show a period of virtual stagnation in income growth
during the late 1970's and early 1980's, followed by a resumption of
growth at rates significantly below those experienced in earlier
periods.
Total labor compensation per capita, by far the largest component of personel income, showed the most dramatic decline and has
experienced the least robust recovery (Figure 57).

67
FIGURE 57
REAL COMPENSATION PER CAPITA
ACTUALVS. 1947-1980TRENO

~~~~~~~~~~~Trend

W;

47,4

51:4

5S:4

MA@:63:4

67:4

71:4

7n:4

7t,.4

83:4

87:4

Personal income, which includes both labor income and income
from property, showed somewhat better performance, suggesting
that rising property income helped to offset the poor performance

of labor income (Figure 58).
FIGURE 58

REAL PERSONAL INCOME PER CAPITA
ACTUAL VIL 1047-T

*

$14 -

rn

$13 -a

*$1$0
7

47:451:4 5& :4

94a3:4

67:471:4 I

:47t.4

8:4

87:4

In an important sense, however, the preceding figures overstate
the growth of income. The data presented so far simply divide

income by the number of people in the country, providing a measure of how much income there is in the economy, but little insight
about where the income comes from or about how much work it
takes to get that income.
Analysis of income components provides further insight into the
processes at work in the economy which govern both the growth

68
and distribution of income. As Figures 59 and 60 demonstrate,
labor income as a share of personal income has fallen substantially
between 1970 and 1987, while income derived from capital (interest,
dividends, and rents) has increased markedly.
FIGURE 59
Labor's Share of Personal Income

0.84
0.82 OJ0 0.78
0.76 0.74 :
0.72 0.70
0.66

0.66
is4 7:4

- |

19624

1957:4

1962:4

1967:4

1972:4

1077:4

s

1982:4

1967 4

FIGURE 60
Property's Share of Personal Income
0.16

0.17

0.16

0.15

0.14

0.13

0.12
195t4

1957:4

19N 4

1967:4

1972:4

1977:4

1964

The growing significance of capital income largely reflects the
rise in interest rates experienced during the late 1970's and early
1980's. Rising interest rates represent an increase in the rate of
return on capital assets, providing increased incomes for those who
have capital assets to use as income-generators.

69
The rate of return on capital assets clearly rose during the
1980's, but not the rate of return on labor. Figure 61 shows the
index of real "total compensation" paid to labor for each hour of
work. This index includes both cash wages and fringe benefits, and
shows that the rate of return for an hour's work in the economy
remained essentially flat throughout the 1980's.
FIGURE 61
REAL COMPENSATION PER HOUR INDEX

1.0 X
0.8-

0.70.6
0.5

0.41947:2 1951:4 19582

¶904 196:2 1969:4

1974:2 1978:4

193&2 1987:4

At the same time, total labor compensation per capita has risen
slowly in the 1980's because a larger fraction of the population is
working (see Figure 57). The difference between total hourly compensation per person in the labor force and total compensation per
capita is shown in Figure 62, underscoring the fact that the rise in
overall labor income during the latter part of the 1980's is almost
entirely the result of more people in the labor force.

70

FIGURE 62
REAL COMPENSATION TRENDS
INDEX 1947 1.00

1959:1 1963:1 1967:1 1971:1 1975:1 1979.1 1931

Transfer payments have also risen as a share of personal income
since 1970, in two distinct waves of expansion associated with the
two recessions of 1974-1975 and 1980-1983.
The data presented so far refer to averages and do not show the
way in which income are distributed. The following chart shows
the share of pretax money income going to the top 20 percent and
the bottom 40 percent of the income distribution relative to their
share in 1947. The data show that the share of national income
going to the richest 20 percent of the population was larger in the
1980's than at any time in the postwar period, while the share
going to the poorest 40 percent fell to its lowest point. Despite the
rise in transfer payments, the overall distribution of income has
become significantly more unequal during the 1980's (Figure 63).

71

FIGURE 63
SHARES OF FAMILY INCOME

~RELATWE
TO 1047 PSO

t~~lo
1.05

1.00

-

0.0-

X

:

_0A5
cm -

0.80
47 50 53
53
SCUw: U.S CMus IUFMU

65

68

71

74

77

80

83

68

This observation is reinforced by a recent study by the CBO, The
Changing Distribution of Federal Taxes: 1975-1990, which examined the distribution of family income by decile in 1977 and 1984,
and projected income distribution in 1988. The study found a sharp
increase in income concentration between 1977 and 1988, with the
share of pretax income of the wealthiest 10 percent rising from
31.9 percent of all income in 1977 to 35 percent in 1984. More dramatically, the top 5 percent saw their share of personal income rise
from 21.5 percent to 24.3 percent, while the top 1 percent moved
from 9.2 percent of pretax income of 11.8 percent (Figure 64). These
calculations are based on the assumption that corporate income
taxes are paid by shareholders, and that such payments are therefore added to the pretax family income in proportion to the capital
income going to each decile. CBO calculations which assume that
corporate income taxes are paid by workers show a slighly different pattern, but with similar results on the changes in distribution
over time.

72
FIGURE 64
CHANGES IN DISTRIBUTION
OF PRE-TAX INCOME

30'

20

-TFaI
Peecen

Poem
Cof

TonWe

mily
Income

eis

10'

~
ion

o
~0 Aic
~amngrserhes
ind3d4the New

Eh 7t

Eo8mh

Rhevieh
Tosum%

Family Income Deciles
Sorce: C~o

9*~c ;
Bud"

ce

EXPLAINING STAGNATION AND GROWING INEQUALITY

As the preceding charts indicate, the income growth rate has
slowed, and income distribution has shown increasing inequality.
On these two propositions, there is remarkable unanimity of opinion among researchers.
A recent article in the New England Economic Review summed
up the data on average earnings as follows:
The growth of real average hourly earnings and compensation has slowed cosiderably since the pre-1973 period. U.S.
workers suffered earnings loses in the 1970's and early
1980's and do not seem to have fully recovered.
Figure 65, taken from the 1988 Economic Report of the President, provides summary evidence of the proposition cited in that
Report that: ". . . in 1987 real hourly earnings remained 9.5 percent below their peak level . . . while "real labor compensation
growth slowed during the 1970's."
,"

73
FIGURE 65

REAL HOURLY EARNINGS & COMPENSATION
128
126124120 118 -

114 -'
112 -

//

;

seEo,'

108 104.

1"I7

//..

l@iN 1411973

PAW E-bW

175

1377

'.

1097

11

1233

13 1

100?

Where unanimity breaks down is on which theories best explain
these trends toward stagnation and inequality, and which policies
are most effective in improving the growth and distribution of
income.

Explaining stagnation
One frequently cited explanation for these trends is the dramatic
decline in productivity growth in the American economy during
the 1970's and 1980's. Ultimately, the wage which can be paid for
an hour of work is limited by the output which can be produced
during that hour and, as Figure 66 shows, output per hour of work
(productivity) in the American economy has sagged in recent years.

74
FIGURE 66

1.4 INDEX,

PRODUCTWTY INTHE PRIVATE SECTOR
I"- .0
ACTUAL VS. 1947-1980)

1.3

Trend

-

1.1
0.9
0.8

0.7 _
0.6
0.5

-

-

-

0.4

19472 1951:4 19t 2 1960:4 19652 1969:4 19742 1978:4 19832 1967:4

However, citing productivity slowdown as an explanation for
stagnating real labor incomes can be overstated since hourly compensation in manufacturing has not even kept pace with productivity growth. As Figures 67 and 68 show, productivity has surged
ahead of compensation in manufacturing, while rising modestly
faster than compensation for the economy as a whole. Faster productivity growth might help stimulate wage growth, but there
appear to be forces at work other than productivity growth which
are helping to hold down the rate of growth in labor income.

75
FIGURE 67
PRODUCTMITY AND COMPENSATION
INTHE PRIVATE SECTOR
PA

Out"

PWHOW

FIGURE 68
PRODUCTIVTY AND COMPENSATION
IN MANUFACTURING

1951:4 1966:2 19W.4 1952

19W.4

A number of observers have suggested that the entry of large
numbers of young workers during the 1970's has played an important role in holding down the rate of growth in compensation, since
very large numbers of similarly skilled workers entering the labor
market at the same time create both a productivity problem
(younger, less skilled workers have lower productivity) and a
"crowding" problem (more competition for jobs creates more downward pressure on wages).
This demographic change does not explain faltering wage and
income growth during the 1980's since the young workers of the

76

1970's are older, more experienced, and entering their prime earning years, and new labor force entrants are fewer in number. If the
1970's labor market entrants received lower incomes because they
were young and less productive, we should expect to see substantial
gains in both earnings and productivity as they mature. No such
pattern has yet been noted, nor do overall productivity trends give
much support to the hypothesis that the work force as a whole is
getting more productive.
A third set of explanatory factors relate to the restructuring of
the economy brought about by macroeconomic distortions noted
earlier in this report. During the 1980's, firms in the manufacturing and extractive industries were put under enormous competitive
pressure by the combination of high interest rates and an overvalued dollar. As Table 8 shows, these industries lost employment
share in the United States to firms in the service sector, a portion
of the economy much less exposed to international competition.
The table also shows that, on average, industries which lost employment share paid wages higher than the average, while those
gaining employment share paid wages lower than the average.
TABLE 8.-EARNINGS IMPACTS OF EMPLOYMENT SHIFTS: 1979-85
Industries

Irdostries

Housq
oftotalemployment
Share
as
compensation
in85
sharepercent
of 1979
1979
1985
1979

1985
1979

~~~~~~~~~~~~~~Chan
~~~~~~~85
faverage

94
3.5
20.8
17.3
Services................................................................................................
108
.8
7.8
7.0
andrealestate........................................................
insurance
Finance
67
.2
19.2
19.0
........................................................................................
trade..
Retail
110
.1
7.7
7.6
trade....................................................................................
Wholesale
136
.0
1.2
1.2
Utilities.................................................................................................
114
.0
7.4
7.4
Construction.........................................................................................
185
.0
2.3
2.3
Government..........................................................................................
136
-. 1
1.7
1.8
Communications...................................................................................
Mining..................................................................................................

1.5

1.4

-. 1

129

120
.3
4.3
4.6
Transportation......................................................................................
99
-1.4
11.710.3
.
Nondurables........................................................................................
618.6
116
-2.9
15.7
.............................................................................................
Durables..
Average
for industries:
share.........................................................................................................................
.95
employment
Gaining
share :....................................................................................................................
Losing
employment

113

Some indication of the impact which this restructuring has had
on labor incomes can be seen in Table 9, which compares labor
income at cyclical peaks with the income that would have resulted
had the same total employment growth been apportioned to industries according to their shares at the preceding cyclical peak. While
changes among industries are always taking place, the chart shows
that in previous expansions these shifts did not result in a dramatic change in the structure of earnings. The current recovery, by
contrast, shows a massive shift toward lower total compensation in
the current recovery relative to the occupational structure prevailing at the end of the expansion of the 1970's. The table shows that
total labor compensation in 1986 would have been about 2 percent
higher had employment growth during the most recent expansion
been more balanced across sectors. This amounted to over $500 of

77
annual labor compensation per full-time equivalent (FTE) worker
and over $6,000 per new FTE worker. Neither the choice of 1979
instead of 1981 as the most recent cyclical peak nor the choice of
final period wages by sector instead of initial period wages by
sector affects these results.
TABLE 9.-Percent differences between actual income and income based on balanced
growth

Expansion ending:
1957 ..............................................................
1959 .............................................................
1969 .............................................................
1973 .............................................................
1981 ..............................................................
1986 ..............................................................

Total Compensation

0.2
.9
-. 8
.5
.5
2.1

Fourth, the pattern of wage stagnation can also be partially explained by changes in the structure of firms in the American economy which are only partially related to international competition.
Over the past several years, many firms have restructured their activities in response to the threat of takeover in the financial markets, higher interest costs, and domestic competition. These restructurings have typically resulted in a restructuring of the way
in which labor is used by the firm, often with negative impacts on
wage growth. "Two-tier" wage agreements (which protect the incomes of existing workers in return for lower wages for new workers), negotiated worker "givebacks" of benefits won earlier, and the
increasing use of part-time or contract labor (what the Conference
board calls the 'contingent work force") all have the common
effect of lowering compensation per unit of output.
Growing inequality
The factors that contribute to stagnation in labor incomes in the
1970's and 1980's-slow productivity growth, macroeconomic imbalance, and internal industry restructuring-do not provide adequate
explanation for the observed trend toward growing inequality in
the distribution of income.
Evidence from a number of independent labor market researchers is lending support to the view that inequality in individual
hourly earnings, and individual yearly incomes, has risen substantially in recent years. A recent review article in the New England
Economic Review summed up this research as follows:
Most researchers agree that the inequality of earnings
has increased since the late 1970's, but there are exceptions. .
The distribution of earnings within industries
and occupations has become more unequal. Wage differentials between industries and between occupations have
also widened.
While there is general agreement on growing inequality in the
distribution of earnings, there is no agreement on the causes of this
shift. A number of factors are generally cited, including intra-industry employment shifts, changing gender composition of the
work force, shifting age distribution of workers, and the changing
mix of occupations in the economy. The authors of the recent
review article conclude:

78
There is thus general agreement on a decline in wage
growth, an increase in the proportion of low-earnings jobs
among full-time, year-round workers, and increased inequality within and between industries and occupations.
However, the causes are not well understood. . . . Consequently, the empirical evidence to date does not uniquely
support any one policy agenda.
The same tendency toward increasing inequality remains evident
with respect to family income. The recent CBO study cited earlier
provides some interesting insight on this pattern as well. Between
1977 and 1984, families in the top two earnings deciles saw their
share of total labor income increase, at the expense of families in
the fourth through eighth decile. The shares of labor income going
to families in the first three income deciles remained essentially
unchanged (Figure 69). This substantial increase in the labor
income going to the top one-fifth of the families is compatible with
a variety of explanations-that the number of very high-paying
jobs has increased substantially over the period, or that the
number of "middle income" jobs has declined significantly over the
period, or that families at the upper end of the income distribution
have a better chance of getting higher paying jobs for second earners.

FIGURE 69
CHANGES IN DISTRIBUITION OF
LABOR INCOME 19rr-1964
TotLgr hengin

Pma

-1

li

2nd 3rd

4th

SM

6UM7M OM Sm 1Oh

Tp 5%1%

Family Inoome Deciles
Sow

Censs

By

oM=

Inequality arising from the process of generating labor income is
reinforced at the family level by strong tendencies toward inequality arising from the concentration of wealth among a relatively
small number of families. Precise data on wealth are extremely difficult to obtain, but a proxy for wealth can be found in the CBO
measures of income derived from wealth. As Figure 70 shows, capital income is distributed much less equitably than is labor income,
with the top 10 percent of the families receiving 63 percent of the
total capital income.

79

FIGURE 70
DISTRIBUTION OF INCOME BY SOURCE. 1984

Id

2rd

3ad 4th

5th

ath

Ah

Oh

9Mh 10th

Top %Top I%

Given this distribution of capital income, any changes in the
economy which raise the rates of return on capital relative to the
rates of return on labor (such as a sustained rise in the interest
rate, combined with rising unemployment) will help worsen the
overall distribution of income.
Tax policy and income distribution
While the economy has been increasing the inequality of pretax
incomes, changes in the tax code over the past several years have
reduced the ability of the tax system to redress inequality in the
distribution of after-tax incomes. Figure 71 shows the changing
composition of Federal revenues, and the extent to which progressive taxes fell in the 1981-1984 period while less progressive taxes
rose. (Increases in the social security payroll tax, adopted as part of
the comprehensive program to strengthen the social security trust
fund, are reflected in this trend.)

80
FIGURE 71
M"OR FEDERAL TAXES
AS A SNARE OF GNP

Cobaw

wncW

Tax
m

-

1950 1I8198
I16 19e 19t2 1965 19611971 1974 4977 1980 1963 iI

Figure 72 shows the changes in the position of each family
income decile as a result of the tax code, by measuring the difference between their pretax share of income and their post-tax share.
As the chart indicates, the tax system one decade ago tended to
benefit the lower income deciles by raising their share of post-tax
income relative to their share of pretax income, while reducing the
shares of the top decile. The tax system in 1988, in contrast, provides less help to the lower deciles and does less to reduce the
income share of the upper decile than a decade earlier.

FIGURE 72

SHIFTS IN INCOME SHARES
From P-Tax to Post Tax
Poem

PW atTOM Fore
' haer

Family Income Decils

81
The CBO study concludes that in 1977-1984 the distribution of
total taxes became less progressive, largely as a result of "a shift in
the tax burden at both extremes of the income distribution. Effective tax rates (the ratio of taxes to family income) rose for the 10
percent of families at the lowest end of the distribution and fell for
the 10 percent of families at the highest." As a result of changes in
the tax system subsequent to 1984, notably the sweeping 1986 revision of the tax code, "the distribution of taxes is expected to
become more progressive but to remain less progressive than in
1977."
In summarizing changes in the tax system since 1980, Professor
James Tobin observed:
. . . the 1981 reduction of high-bracket rates was obtained
without any compensatory sacrifice of loopholes . . . Start-

ing from this new status quo, in 1986, the wealthy successfully extracted further reductions in top rates as the price
for closing loopholes that never were justified.

VIII. THE LEGACY OF EXPERIMENT: DISTORTED PRIORITIES
National priorities are generally reflected in the Federal budget
and, during the 1980's, these priorities have shifted dramatically.
Military spending has increased sharply, as have interest payments
on the debt used to finance these expenditure increases (Figure 73).
FIGURE 73
NET INTEREST PAID BY FEDERAL GOVERNMENT
AS ASWAE Of FEDERAL E(PENDmJlrES

14.0%
13.0%
12.0%I11.0%
10.0%

9.0%
8.0%

6.0%
5.0%

1947

1951

196

1ow

13

167

1971

1975

1979

13

1967

As a result of these shifts in priorities, important areas of public
responsibility have been neglected, particularly those areas which
address needed investments in the future of the country. As Figure
74 makes clear, the funds available to support all discretionary,
nondefense activities of government have fallen sharply during the
1980's and are projected to continue this decline in the 1990's.

82
FIGURE 74
NONDEFENSE DISCRETIONARY SPENDING
AS A SHAR Of GNP
6.0%
5.8%5.0%5.4%
5.2%5.0%

468%
4.6%
4.4%

4.2%
4.0%
3.8%
3.6%
7071 72 7374 75 76 77 767 80 81 2 83 84

8867 888901 993

This is a trend with grave implications for our Nation's future,
since public "investments in the future" are indispensable to the
overall economic growth process. Neglect of these investments
today could well hamper our ability to grow in the future.
INVESTMENT DEFICITS

Trade and budget deficits, problems in and of themselves, are
also symptomatic of underlying weaknesses in the economy. To address these weaknesses effectively will require a serious commitment to investment in the future. Unfortunately the policies of the
1980's have focused on the short term of the expense of future concerns. They have failed to stimulate domestic savings and investment. Unprecedented foreign borrowing has occurred and has not
been focused on inverstment objectives. As a result plant and
equipment are increasingly outmoded, capacity constraints are increasingly a problem, and our ability to compete effectively is
weakened.
Investment problems are not limited to the private sector, however. Public investment-in physical infrastructure, civilian R&D,
health, education, and training and retraining-have all been neglected in recent years, as policies have been directed to reduction
or even outright repeal of such programs.
The neglect of invetment in human resources over the past eight
years is especially significant in light of the profound shifts already
taking place in the size and composition of the population. The outline of these shifts is well-known. Life expectancy is increasing, and
the relatively high birthrates of the two decades following World
War II have given way to much lower birthrates. (The "baby
boom" generation of 1945-1964 has been succeeded by the "baby
bust" generation.) As a consequence the proportion of elderly persons in the population will increase as the proportion of young

83
people declines, with important implications for employment, training, education, and health care.
EDUCATION

In a marked departure from the reports of the least seven years,
the 1988 Economic Report of the President sets forth the arguments for government, including Federal Government, support for
education in terms of major social benefits, wider economic opportunity, and difficulties faced by families in financing an education.
A similar shift appears in the FY89 budget request, which for the
first time since 1980 proposes to increase funding for education
rather than cut it sharply.
During the 1980's, the Federal Government has been making a
shrinking contribution to the Nation's investment in education.
After FY81, when outlays by the Department of Education (DOE)
peaked at $17.1 billion, Federal spending on education declined.
Not until FY86 did DOE's budget return to its 1981 level. Although
DOE outlays of $18.8 billion for Fiscal 1988 will be $1.7 billion
above the 1981 fiscal year level, the increase has not been enough
to keep up with inflation and real spending is down about 14.3 percent. Moreover, had Congress acceded to administration budget requests this decade for DOE, Federal spending on education would
have fallen 36 percent after inflation. For FY88, total Federal outlays by DOE will amount to just under 6 percent of total education
spending and slightly less than four-tenths of one percent of GNP.
Aside from a small amount of DOE funds that are used for eductional research, Federal spending in 1988 is almost evenly divided
between post-secondary programs and elementary and secondary
education programs. The Federal role in elementary and secondary
education, however, is different in important respects from its role
in higher education, and the two need to be reviewed separately.
Post-secondaryeducation
Expenditures for post-secondary education in 1987 totaled $109
billion (see Table 10). Fifty-six percent of these expenditures are financed by private sources. Of the public share, about two-thirds of
it is provided by state governments, 27 percent by the Federal Government, and the remainder by local governments.
TABLE 10.-PUBLIC AND PRIVATE HIGHER EDUCATION ENROLLMENT AND EXPENDITURES IN
CONSTANT FISCAL YEAR 1986 DOLLARS; FISCAL YEARS 1970 THROUGH 1987 1
1970
In billions of fiscal year 1986 dollars:
Federal..
.
.
.
State.........................................................................
Local..........................................................................
Other..........................................................................
Total..
.
.
Percapita (thousands of fiscal year 1986 dollars)
Enrollment
(millions).................................................

1976

1978

1980

1982

1986

$11.9
.
..................................................................
$12.8
5116
512.2
$11.8
$12.9
$18.5 $25.2
$25.8
$25.5
$26.0
$31.5
$2.6
$3.3
$3.1
$2.3
$2.2
$2.7
.5 $42.7
$44.1
$43.3
$43.7
$58.3
. 5715.
$8..
89
8.005

..................................................
$841
$84.7 583.3 583.7
$7.6
$7.5
$7.2
$6.8
11.185
11.286
11.570
12.372

1987

$13.1
$32.7
$2.6
$60.5

$105.4 5108.9
9.....
$8.6
$8.8
12.247
12.398

*Constant
FY86
dollars
arebased
on theConsumer
PriceIndex,
Urban,
fromtheU.S.Bureau
ofLabor
Statistics,
asfollows:
theIndex
was
1131 for 1970,166.2for 1976,191.3for 1978,339.7for 1980,286.0for 1982,327.3for 1986;and 336.7for 1987.
SourceTable
prepared
by theCRS,
based
on datafromtheDigest
of Education
Statistics
1987,Table
1,the Digest
of Education
Statistics.
1982,Table
14, andthe U.S.Department
of Education
FiscalYear1988Budget,
Summary
andBackground
Information,
Appendix,
Table
2.

84
The Federal investment in higher education reflects a widely
shared and long-standing perception of the national interest dating
back to the establishment of the land-grant college system in 1862.
It was reflected in the G.I. Bill which following World War II led to
an increase of nearly two-thirds in the percentage of Americans enrolled in higher education resident degree programs and a 30 percent increase-from 4.6 percent to 6.2 percent-in the percentage
of the population with four or more years of college. (That latter
percentage reached 17 percent in 1980 and 19.4 percent in 1986.)
Federal investment is higher education has taken different
forms, but by far the most significant is support provided directly
to students either in the form of grants or loans. Federal programs
from time to time have in addition provided incentives in special
fields identified as being of immediate national concern, including
graduate fellowships for advanced study in the sciences, mathematics, and foreign languages.
Student grant and loan programs.-Since 1981 all of these programs have been subordinated to the overriding policy objective of
reducing Federal student aid expenditures. The 1980-1988 funding
trends for these programs consistently reflect the "annual funding
tension" between Congress and the administration:
Although 2.86 million students received Pell Grants this year,
the value to students has declined significantly over the years, with
the maximum Pell Grant paying only 37 percent of the cost of a
public four-year institution today, compared to 53 percent during
the 1980-1981 school year.
Appropriations for the Pell Grant program have increased 26
percent in real terms between FY80 and FY88, an increase of less
than 3 percent per year. After peaking at 2.85 million in the 19801981 school year, the number of recipients declined significantly
and did not return to the 1980-1981 level until the 1987-1988
school year.
The Supplemental Educational Opportunity Grant program has
been continued despite repeated administration proposals to eliminate it, but with an overall funding decline in real terms of 20.3
percent;
The College Work Study program, also targeted for elimination,
has declined 22.7 percent in real terms;
The Perkins Loan Program, also targeted for elimination, has declined 49.4 percent in real terms;
The Guaranteed Student Loan (GSL) program has grown 9.3 percent in real terms (this program would have been cut virtually in
half in the current fiscal year if the administration's restructuring
proposal had been adopted.)
These funding shifts and reductions have been accompanied by
an expansion of student borrowing through the GSL program that
was largely unanticipated and whose longer term implications are
little understood. In analyzing the trend, a CRS study has suggested that the explanation lies in rising average costs that have not
been matched either by the "average" amount of Federal grant
and work awards or by student or parent wage increases.

85
In a 1986 study published by this Committee, Janet Hansen of
the College Board observed that "the Federal strategy for fostering
equality of opportunity in higher education, which initially focused
on a balanced array of grants, loans, and work opportunities for
the disadvantaged, has been transformed, with uncertain and
largely unexamined implications for the groups who were the original focus of Federal concern."
Moreover, as the Hansen study noted, there is uncertainty about
the significance of the future financial obligations which growing
student indebtedness imposes. First of all, indebtedness has risen
very rapidly in recent years and total indebtedness levels are much
higher than a decade ago. This is true especially when loans have
been used to finance graduate education, and a student can now
borrow a maximum of $54,750 for undergraduate and graduate
education, repayable over a 10-year period. In addition, the burden
of indebtedness depends not only on the size of the debt but also
upon real wages, changing price levels, and other economic factors
prevailing during the period of repayment.
There is also uncertainty over the degree to which student debt
repayment obligations may limit future decisions with respect to
jobs and careers, family plans, home ownership, and other significant financial undertakings. There is no conclusive evidence in this
area, as there is not as yet adequate research focused on the relatively heavier student borrowers of the mid-1980's. According to
Ms. Hansen:
Even though it is virtually impossible as yet to disentangle the knotty question of how much debt students can
afford to take on without adverse consequences, however,
it is possible to demonstrate that, at the point of borrowing
under loan programs as presently constituted, students
cannot know what the real burden of the debt they are assumung will be.
"Critical studies" programs.-In this area the 1958 National Defense Education Act (NDEA), a response to the Soviet sputnik challenge that was perceived to be scientific and technological as well
as military, remains the benchmark. The NDEA program went
beyond traditional impact aid or assistance to land-grant colleges
and provided assistance across the country for specific programs in
mathematics, science, and foreign languages. While the NDEA expired, many of the programs (such as the Perkins Loan program)
continued under other acts. During a period of increasing enrollments in institutions of higher education, NDEA graduate fellowships helped provide the pool of highly trained Ph.D.'s needed to
staff these expanding institutions. Despite the clear perception
since 1980 of the growing technological and scientific challenge to
the United States in world markets, there has been no proposal
from the administration to undertake an effort comparable to that
of 30 years ago. In 1984, however, Congress passed the Education
for Economic Security Act which, while emphasizing elementary
and secondary school science and mathematics programs, also provided funds at the post-secondary level.

86
Elementary and secondary education
At the elementary and secondary school level, the Federal role is
limited but critical. Traditionally, state and local governments are
responsible for administration of their school systems and for most
aspects of education policy, including teacher certification, curriculum and course management, and achievement testing. They are
also primarily responsible for funding.
Together, in Fiscal 1987, state and local governments provided 94
percent of total government funding of education (Table 11). State
governments have replaced local governments as the largest source
of funds in recent years, and provided an estimated 50 percent of
all government funds, with local governments providing an estimated 44 percent and the Federal Government the remainder. Federal funding as a percentage of total government funding of education has declined from almost 10 percent in Fiscal 1980 to about 6
percent-roughly a 40 percent decline in the Federal share, which
now stands at its lowest level in since 1964.
TABLE 11.-PUBLIC AND PRIVATE ELEMENTARY AND SECONDARY EDUCATION ENROLLMENT AND
EXPENDITURES INCONSTANT FISCAL YEAR 1986 DOLLARS, FISCAL YEARS 1970 THROUGH 1987
1970

1976

1978

1982

1986

.........................................................
$12.4
$13.2
$13.0
$11.1
$45.7
$62.2
$61.6
$61.6
$61.3

$72.2

$9.4
.$9.8
$74.5

$56.7
$55.8
$17.1 $16.0$16.7

$65.5
$13.6

$67.4
$14.1

$
$132.3
...................................................................
$155.4
$155.4
$148.3 $145.0
Percapita(Thousands
of fiscal year1986 dollars) .. $2.2
$2.5
$2.6
$2.5
$2.5
Enrollment
(millions)................................................. 59.124 60.976
60.003
58.215 57.971

$160.7
$2.8
57.360

$165.4
$2.9
57.710

Inbillions of fiscal year1986 dollars:
Federal..
.
.
State..........................
Local.................................................................
Other.................................................................

.

$62.8
$13.9

$64.8
$63.8
$16.8

1980

$9.4

1987

Total
.

'Constant
FY86 dollars
arebased
on theConsumer
PriceIndex,
Urban,
fromthe U.S.
Bureau
of Labor
Statistics,
as follows:
theindex
was
113.1for 1970;166.2for 1976,191.3for 1978;239.7for 1980;286.0for 1982;327.3for 1986;and 336.7for 1987.
Source:
Table
prepared
by theCRS,
based
on DatafromtheDigest
of Education
Statistics,
1987,
table1: theDigest
of Education
Statistics,
1982,Table14, andthe 0.S.Department
of Education
FiscalYear1988Budget:
Summary
andBackground
Information,
Appendix
Table
2.

The Federal role has evolved in response to perceived national
interests-the need in the 1950's to match the Soviet space achievement, and more generally the Soviet challenge in science and technology; and the need in the 1960's and 1970's to assure equal access
and opportunity, where necessary providing supplementary programs, e.g., in the areas of preschool and nutrition.
The challenges of the 1980's are not so much different in kind as
they are in focus and magnitude from the earlier challenges. Scientific and technological competition is perceived today in terms of
performance in world markets relative to our trading partners. The
perception of access and opportunity has been broadened to extend
to (1) a clearly indentifiable and growing "at risk" population and
(2) reasonable expectations of productive and well-paid employment
in a complex technological economy.
With respect to perceived needs, there is broad agreement among
the numerous recent reports on the U.S. system of education that
it is seriously deficient in a number of important respects. A 1986

87
summary report prepared by the CRS identified and discussed
seven principal national reports.' All cite the following:
Poor scores of U.S. students on internationally administered
tests;
Connection between declining school performance and the
declining international position in commerce, industry, science,
and technological innovation relative to other nations.
All are consistent with earlier work by Edward Denison, John W.
Kendrick, and others who have shown positive correlation between
education and productivity growth. These and related issues were
discussed in detail in a series of nine hearings held last year in this
Committee's Subcommittee on Education and Health.
Nonetheless, in every year but FY89, administration budget proposals have sought sharp reductions in every major elementary
and secondary school program. Final appropriations have reflected
the executive/congressional "fiscal tension' previously mentioned.
The Compensatory Education program was cut by 14.8 percent in
real terms between 1980 and 1988. During this period, the administration attempted to cut the program's budget by up to one-third,
but was prevented from doing so by Congress.
The Education Block Grant program, created in 1981 by merging
earlier categorical programs, was cut in real terms by 60 percent
between 1980 and 1988.
The Education of the Handicapped program, initially targeted for
elimination, experienced a slight rise in funding of 3.6 percent between 1980 and 1988.
The funding for the Vocational Rehabilitation program rose a
modest 1.8 percent in real terms.
Currently, about 25 percent of all high school students fail to
finish school and receive their diploma on schedule. Some argue
that about half of these eventually finish high school or complete
an equivalency program at a later date. Nevertheless, at least 13 to
14 percent of all high school students never complete even this
basic level of education. The result is a tragic waste, both for the
Nation and the individuals affected. When a senior DOE official
was asked whether it was possible for our country to afford a 14
percent high school dropout rate, his response was "Obviously, we
are affording it." Others argue that a dropout rate of one in seven
represents a loss that the economy can ill afford.
There are proven ways of reducing the dropout rate. Studies of
the Head Start program and other preschool programs show that
children who have had the benefits of these programs are consistently less likely to drop out of school. One of the more comprehensive longitudinal studies of preschool programs, "Changed Lives:
The Effects of the Perry Preschool Program on Youths through
Age 19," found that participation in preschool programs ultimately

I The reports are (1) A Nation at Risk (1983) from the National Commission on Excellence in
Education; (2) Making the Grade (1983) from the Twentieth Century Fund Task Force on Federal Education Policy; (3) Action for Excellence (1983) from the Education Commission of the
States Task Force for Economic Growth; (4) High School (1983) by Ernest L. Boyer of The Carne-

gie Foundation for the Advancement of Teaching; (5) EducatingAmericans for the 21st Century

(1983) from the National Science Board Commission on Precollege Education in Mathematics,
Science, and Technology; (6) A Place Called School (1983) by John 1. Goodlad (report from A
Study of Schooling); and (7) Horace's Compromise (1984) by Theodore R. Sizer (report from A
Study of High Schools) (CRS Report No. 86-56 EPW, March 17, 1986).

88
reduced the high school dropout rate by one-third. Witnesses who
appeared this year before the Subcommittee on Health and Education of the Joint Economic Committee also testified that quality
preschool programs appeared to be the most effective dropout prevention measure.
Beyond the problem of dropouts, there is a growing concern that
millions of Americans-including many who graduate from high
school-are functionally illiterate and do not have the reading and
writing skills needed to participate in America's increasingly hightechnology economy.
Although fewer than 1 percent of Americans are illiterate in the
sense that they can neither read nor write even at the most rudimentary level, many are functionally illiterate in that they are incapable of understanding written instructions necessary to accomplish simple tasks in performing a job or carrying out everyday
life. Based on a 1982 survey, the Department of Education estimates that 13 percent of adult Americans, or 17 to 21 million persons, are functionally illiterate. Among native-born Americans, 70
percent of those who were found to be illiterate were high-school
dropouts. A 1986 study found that 40 percent of enlistees in the
armed services read at the 9th grade level or lower.
Illiteracy imposes a high cost on the economy. Corporations alone
spend as much as $10 billion per year on remedial reading, writing,
and math programs for employees, according to one recent survey.
Another study estimated that the total cost of illiteracy in terms of
welfare payments, crime, job incompetence, lost taxes, and remedial education amounts to more than $200 billion annually.
The Federal Government is doing an inadequate job of addressing the problems of functionally illiteracy. Even though 17 to 21
million Americans are functionally illiterate, the Adult Education
Act, which is the primary vehicle for addressing the problem,
serves only 3.2 million people each year. Despite a modest increase
in funding for FY88, Federal expenditures for adult education have
declined 19 percent in real terms since 1980.
Training and retraining-While the financial commitment to
the Federal Government's major training and retraining program
has remained roughly constant during this decade-$5.7 billion requested for Fiscal 1989-there is widespread concern that these
programs are not adequate for the labor market and demographic
realities that we face.
At a hearing before the Subcommittee on Education and Health,
witnesses called for reform in the current welfare system to enhance employment and training components to aid recipients in
getting education, training, and the support needed to seek, find,
and maintain jobs.
The combination of rapid technological change and increased
international competitive pressure have made the need for access
to mid-career training common rather than exceptional. In this
regard, our current training system has failed to keep pace. Similarly, with slower growth in the labor force, it is becoming increasingly important that we fully utilize all of our human resources.
That will require steps to overhaul our basic welfare programs so
that they are fully integrated with training and education systems.
Simultaneously, efforts to assure that young workers, particularly

89
those who have or are likely to drop out of school, are fully
equipped for the modern work place must be intensified.
HEALTH

Over time, health care costs have been rising significantly as a
percentage of GNP. To meet our health care needs we will need to
make more effective use of health care resources. The old saw, "An
ounce of prevention is worth a pound of cure," takes on new meaning in the face of rising costs and a changing population with
changing needs. Preventive programs are generally cost effective
because they represent relatively small initial investments as opposed to later major health care expenditures and because they can
mean not only longer life expectancy but a longer, more effective
period of productive working years.
Reallocation of expenditures between the public and private sectors does not eliminate the need for health care services and does
not necessarily mean reduced expenditures. Efforts to reduce
health care expenditures by developing more efficient reimbursement mechanisms and promoting more efficient health care delivery systems are very important, but do not alone constitute a longtem health policy.
In addition, the Nation's health care problems are changing, and
policies must change with them. The traditional communicable diseases have generaly been brought under control, but have been superceded by other clearly discernible threats to the Nation's health
and productivity-chronic disabling diseases, environmental hazards, substance abuse, and AIDS are among them.
Policy focus
It is estimated that steps taken since 1980 to restrain hospital
care costs will hold the rate of increase in Federal expenditures in
the 1985-1989 period well below the rate of increase in the 19801985 period. However, with the emphasis on controlling hospital
costs there has been a significant shift to outpatient care, and outpatient expenditures are growing much more rapidly than inpatient expenditures.
Restraining unwarranted cost increases is very important, and
has positive implications for restraining Federal expenditues. But
the Nation still needs to deal with the fundamental long-term
health care requirements of a changing population. Attempts to
achieve short-term budget savings by reducing or eliminating a
wide range of preventive and research programs, including many
whose effectivness has been demonstrated over a period of years,
would appear to be counterproductive. The administration has
sought to curtail a number of cost-effective programs, such as the
special Supplemental Food Program for Women, Infants, and Children (WIC) and childhood immunization programs.
The WIC program provides more than 3.4 million participants
with special food benefits which are specifically prescribed according to the nutritional needs of the participants. Massachusetts'
studies of WIC participation show reduced numbers of low birth

90
weights and neonatal mortality rates.' An evaluation undertaken
at the Harvard School of Public Health estimates that the relatively higher birth weights of infants born to WIC participants mean a
savings of approximately $3.00 in later hospital costs for every
dollar expended on the WIC program.
Childhood immunization programs help states and localities to
bring vaccine-preventable childhood diseases, including measles, rubella, diphtheria, and whooping cough, under control and have
been instrumental in the dramatic decline in the incidence of such
diseases. Pediatric experts have testified to the Committee that, for
every dollar spent on childhood immunization programs, the government saved roughly $10.00 in later medical costs. A study by
the Center for Disease Control (CDC), for example, estimates that
$180 million spent over several years on a measles vaccination program reduced subsequent hearing impairments, retardation, and
other health-related programs, thereby saving $1.3 billion in
medium-term and long-term care. Efforts to reduce funding for
these programs have been repeatedly rebuffed in the Congress.
Budget requests for the United States Public Health Service
(USPHS) also appear shortsighted. The USPHS includes the National Institutes of Health (NIH), CDC, and the Alcohol, Drug
Abuse and Mental Health Administration (ADAMHA). Despite the
fact that these units have major ongoing responsibilities in such
areas as research, epidemiology, and prevention of substance
abuse-programs that clearly serve national interests-PHS budgets have been systematically targeted for reduction. Annual budget
requests by the administration consistently have been below the
prior year's appropriation and Congress has regularly voted to restore funds for the Public Health Service. In real terms, the administration's request for the current fiscal year was 20 percent less
than the FY81 appropriation.
Looking ahead
As the end of the decade approaches, it is useful to review the
goals which the Surgeon General's 1979 Report on Health Promotion and Disease Prevention identified as reasonable to accomplish
with respect to reducing preventable death and disease by 1990.
They included a 25 percent reduction in the infant mortality rate,
a 20-25 percent reduction in the death rates for adolescents and
adults, and significant progress in assuring healthier and more vigorous lives for older Americans.
The Midcourse Review published in 1986 by the Public Health
Service was encouraging in some respects, but raised serious concerns in others. Many of the goals related to pregnancy and infant
health appear unlikely to be achieved; in the words of the Review,
"Despite the summaries of progress contained in the midcourse
review, which depict modest- progress in the first years of this
decade, an analysis of trends through 1990 provides the unsettling-and challenging-conclusion that many of the objectives will
not be achieved, given current rates of progress." Given the fact
that in 1950 the U.S. infant mortality rate ranked well above the
I Kotelchuk, M. et al. "WIC Participation and Pregnancy Outcomes: Massachusetts Statewide
Evaluation Project." American Journalof Public Health, 74:1084-1092. October 1984.

91

average of 23 European and Pacific countries and today ranks
somewhat below average, this is a sobering assessment (Table 12).
TABLE 12.-Ranking of OECD countries by infant mortality rates; rankedfrom lowest

to highest rates
1950
New Zealand
Sweden
Netherlands
Australia
United Kingdom
United States
Norway
Iceland
Switzerland
Finland
Canada
Denmark
Ireland
Luxembourg
France
Germany
Belgium
Japan
Greece
Italy
Spain
Austria
Portugal
NoTE.-This ranking is based on an unweighted
rates and is therefore approximate.

1980's
Japan
Finland
Sweden
Iceland
Switzerland
Norway
Denmark
Netherlands
Canada
Australia
France
Germany
Ireland
United Kingdom
United States
Austria
Belgium
Luxembourg
New Zealand
Spain
Greece
Italy
Portugal
average of male and female infant mortality

PHYSICAL INFRASTRUCTURE

During this decade, policies with respect to the Nation's physical
infrastructure have generally been designed to reduce Federal responsibility for investing in infrastructure, to shift the responsibility for investment from the Federal Government to state and local
governments under the guise of the New Federalism program, or to
leave the responsibility to be assumed by the private sector as part
of the administration's preference for free market economics.
As Professor Michael Porter of the Harvard Business School recently concluded, with respect to physical infrastructure, "the administration's major failure is in not investing more in America's
future economic prosperity."
Since 1980, capital spending has fallen significantly as a fraction
of Federal outlays. In the decade of the 1960's, Federal nondefense
physical capital investment accounted for 2.0 percent of total Federal outlays (see Figure 75). During the 1980's, investment outlays
amounted to only 1.2 percent of the budget, just over half the previous share. Concurrently, Federal grants to state and local governments for capital investments declined from 3.5 percent of Federal
outlays to 2.6 percent (Figure 76). Overall, Federal outlays for nondefense capital investments declined from 5.5 percent of total Federal outlays during the 1960's to 3.8 percent during the 1980's
(Figure 77).

84-405 0 - 88 - 4

92
FIGURE 75
FEDERAL NONDEFENSE CAPITAL OUTLAYS
(Ama Pe

Ouftp
l at TotaJ

YEARS
FISCAL

FIGURE 76
CAPITAL GRANTS TO STATE &LOCAL GOVERNMENTS

FISCALYEARS

FIGURE 77
FEDERAL CAPITAL OUTLAYS AND GRANTS

1961-1970

1971-1990

FISCALYEARS

1961-1990

93
Since the 1960's, Federal spending for capital investments has
also declined significantly as a share of GNP. Between 1961 and
1970, the combined total of Federal outlays and of grants to state
and local governments for capital investment came to an average
of 1.06 percent of GNP. This share fell slightly to an average of
1.05 percent between 1971 and 1980. Since 1980, however, total Federal capital spending amounted to only 0.87 percent of GNP
(Figure 78).
FIGURE 78
FEDERAL CAPITAL OUTLAYS AND GRANTS
PERTOF QW
1.2
1.10

1.0

0.5
0.4

0.3

0.2
0.l

19IS1170

1971.1=
FSCAJL YEAS

1961-19

The public capital investments that make up the basic infrastructure contribute to economic prosperity in two ways.
Many of the services provided by public investment in infrastructure are consumed directly by American households and taken for
granted until permitted to decay-an overflowing sewer, a dry
faucet, an unmended pothole, a collapsed bridge, a near-collision
between two commercial jets. Nancy Rutledge, Executive Director
of the National Council on Public Works Improvement, recently
listed ways in which infrastructure serves the public:
To the public, the physical infrastructure represents a
set of services, such as reliable transport of goods and
people, fresh water, protection from floods, and safe disposal of waste. These are all basic components that determine
the nation's quality of life and its economic vitality.
Physical infrastructure provides indispensable support to the private sector manufacturing and commercial activities of the economy. Few private investments in factories, offices, or shopping centers would be profitable if their construction costs also included the
roads necessary to bring the products to market, the reservoirs and
aqueducts needed to supply fresh water, or the sewers and treatment plants needed to dispose of industrial waste. John Horsley,
Chair of the Rebuild America Coalition-a group of public and pri-

94
vate trade associations concerned with the condition of the Nation's infrastructure-recently testified on the contribution of infrastructure to the private economy:
The United States has invested hundreds of billions of
dollars in infrastructure. The money has been well spent.
America's infrastructure has fostered economic growth,
created jobs, and supported American business in its struggle to compete in international markets . . . Economically,
a strong infrastructure supports an active and efficient
commerce, allowing goods and people to move rapidly to
centers of business and trade. This is a benefit accruing
not to a single community, but to every community. Economic growth has a ripple effect, and infrastructure provides the foundation for the nation's continued growth and
prosperity. The responsibility for investing in infrastructure is shared among the Federal Government and state
and local governments. Throughout the history of this
country, the Federal Government has fulfilled a central
role in financing and building needed infrastructure, from
the canal and wilderness road-building programs in the
late 18th and early 19th centuries, to support for the railroads in the late 19th century, to the dam-building and
rural electrification projects of the Depression years. As
early as the 1820's and 1830's, 11 percent of the Federal
budget was devoted to infrastructure investment, according to the National Council on Public Works Improvement.
On the modern problem of interstate highways, the CRS
recently reported that Federal involvement in highway
construction began as early as 1921 with enactment of legislation establishing a system of "Federal-aid highways."
Today the Federal Government has major responsibility for important infrastructure investigations that will affect the Nation's
future economic strength. These include financing the construction
of interstate highways, mass transit, and wastewater treatment
plants, to name only a few. In some cases a Federal agency is the
provider. The Army Corps of Engineers, for example, dredges ports
and constructs waterway improvements. Far more commonly, the
Federal Government shares the financing of infrastructure provided by state and local governments. The Environmental Protection
Agency, for example, pays 55 percent of the construction cost for
local wastewater treatment plants. The Federal Highway Trust
Fund currently pays 90 percent of the cost of constructing interstate highways and up to 80 percent of the cost of repairing
bridges.
Nonetheless, over the past seven years, Federal Government policies have been designed to reduce or "stretch out" programs for
public sector capital investment. A 1985 CBO study, The Federal
Budget for Public Works Infrastructure, concluded:
In recent years, this section of the budget has been the
major focus of efforts to slow the growth of the Federal
deficit.

95
Earlier this year, the Congress overrode two presidential vetoes
of major infrastructure bills, the Clean Water Act and the Surface
Transportation and Uniform Relocation Assistance Act. The first
carries forward earlier agreements with respect to continuing funding for water projects, while the second provides $70 billion in
highway funds and $18 billion in transit funds over four years.
Virtually all of the growth since 1980 in Federal Government infrastructure has occurred in structures and equipment that have
military uses, as Figure 79 shows. There has been little growth in
the stock of Federal infrastructure with civilians uses, such as
interstate highways, dams, and research facilities. Since 1980, the
net stock of military structures and equipment has grown 29 percent in real terms, while the net stock of federally funded civilian
infrastructure has grown only 5 percent.
FIGURE 79
NET STOCK OF NONRESIDENTIAL FEDERAL CAPITAL
BlAJONS OF Iaa OOULARS

340
390'
3S
300
230
260
240

220 -NIA
100
1961

106

1969

1973

197

1961

195

Last year, the Joint Economic Committee conducted a series of
hearings on the subject of prudent investment in the Nation's
future economic strength. During these hearings, the Committee
examined the role of Federal investment in three important forms
of infrastructure-the air transportation system, the statistical infrastructure, and R&D. In these areas, the Committee found that
the current policies have led to inadequate levels of Federal investment, with probable adverse consequences for the economy in the
long run.
Air travel is today the fastest growing mode of travel in the
United States. More than 1.1 million people travel daily on commercial airlines, with half of all airline passengers traveling for
business purposes, according to a Gallup poll conducted for the Air
Transport Association. The Federal Aviation Administration (FAA)
estimates that by 1992 airline travel will double to almost two million passengers per day. Aviation accounts for more passenger

96
miles than all other forms of public transportation combined and is
second only to the automobile in terms of intercity passenger miles.
The critical role of the Federal Government in aviation was
spelled out by two witnesses before the JEC:
The air traffic control system is owned and operated by
the FAA and represents the most direct and significant
Federal influence on aviation.
... the aviation industry and in particular the airline
industry is the only business that comes to my mind that
is totally dependent on a Federal involvement 24 hours a
day, 365 days a year. In order to move our product, we
cannot move an airplane an inch without the active involvement of the Federal Government, namely the FAA.
Virtually all air travelers and air transportation professionals
are familiar with delays, misplaced baggage, abrupt cancellations,
and arbitrary routings and reroutings. One witness estimated that
the annual cost of delays, both to passengers and the airline industry, is $5 billion or more. The FAA's response to the problem of
delays has been to public the on-time record of all major scheduled
airlines in the hope that passenger pressures will force airlines
with unacceptable records to improve them.
Of even greater concern is the declining margin of safety in air
travel. More than a year ago in the course of a series of JEC Subcommittee hearings on Federal safety standards, witnesses described serious problems with respect to the condition of U.S. airports and safety equipment, and the adequacy of airplane inspection, system maintenance, and air traffic control. Depsite a much
higher traffic load than a decade earlier, there are fewer fully operational air traffic controllers and fewer safety and repair specialists, more operational errors, and more near collisions. Indeed, in
the last five years alone, near midair collisions have risen steeply
and steadily every year, more than tripling since 1982. Such incidents numbered 1,063 for the 1987 calendar year, an increase of
some 27 percent over the 1986 level of 840. Figure 80 shows the history of near midair collisions since 1973 and the sharp increase
since 1982, for all aircraft and for commercial airlines.

97
FIGURE 80
FEDERAL AVIATION OUTLAYS
(162 DOLLARS PER 1.000 REV. PAsM MILES)

197

17

179

190

192
1061
FISCAL YR

1963

196

1965

196

Today's problems result in large part from the failure to take
prudent steps to meet the rising demands on the system. Investment has been inadequate. As Figure 81 shows, the Federal Government currently spends just over $11 per 1,000 revenue passenger miles compared to more than $17 per 1,000 passenger miles a
decade ago. Federal grants-in-aid to state and local governments
for airport construction and improvements are just half the level of
a decade ago, as shown in Figure 82.

98
FIGURE 81
FEDERAL AIRPORT GRANTS-IN-AID
(1982 OCUARS PER 1,000 REV. PAM MILES)

&s

1977

1976

1979

190

1961

192

1963

194

1965

1966

FISCAL YEAR

FIGURE 82
NEAR MIDAIR COLLISIONS
P'muands)
1.1 _
1.0
0.9 0. 0.7
CA
0.5
0.4
0.3 *27
02
0.1

93

0.0
1973

1975

1977

1979

1961

1963

1965

1967

Yet resources are available for investment purposes. The Aviation Trust Fund, which is financed by a tax on air travelers, currently has an unappropriated surplus in excess of $8 billion. At the
same time, the National Airspace Systems Plan, a program developed in the early 1980's to refurbish and update the Nation's air
traffic control system, lags behind schedule in development and implementation. Nonetheless, despite delays in installing the necessary hardware, the plan for reducing personnel has been implemented. As a result, the system today has too few controllers to

99
handle the increased traffic load and too few systems specialists to
maintain and repair the radar and other safety equipment.
STATISTICAL INFRASTRUCTURE

The public investment in Federal statistical programs is very
modest, accounting for less than two-tenths of one percent (0.2 percent) of the Federal budget. While the programs are little known to
the public at large, they play an essential role in the U.S. economy
by providing an indispensable basis for responsible decisionmaking
in both the private and public sectors.
U.S. statistical programs have traditionally set world standards,
meeting rigorous professional standards to assure the quality of
statistical information in terms of comprehensiveness, accuracy,
timeliness, and availability. The Bureau of Labor Statistics (BLS),
the Bureau of the Census, and other Federal statistical agencies
have served as models for other nations' statistical systems.
Japan's modern statistical infrastructure was established only after
World War II, with the assistance of U.S. advisers, and drew on
techniques pioneered in U.S. agencies.
Unfortunately, trends since 1980 have raised ever more insistent
questions about our commitment and capacity to maintain the high
quality of existing statistical programs. Furthermore, there are serious concerns about our ability to adapt to rapid and profound
changes in the economy; as one witness told this Committee, quoting a former Commissioner of BLS, "If economic statistics are not
continually improved, they will deteriorate."
These trends have been reviewed in some detail by the Committee, which has a long-standing concern for the quality and integrity
of the Federal statistical infrastructure. Several of the most serious
current problems are outlined below.
Inadequate resources
Of the nine major statistical agencies, six have operating budgets
today that are at lower levels, in real terms, than eight years ago.
Table 13 shows that, in most cases, stripped of one-time projects
and artificial transfers, the FY80-FY88 comparison obscures the
even sharper reductions that occurred during the intervening
years.
TABLE 13.-BUDGET AUTHORITY FOR MAJOR STATISTICAL AGENCIES, 1980-88
Fiscal
year-

1980

1981

1982

1983

1984

Operating
budgets (millions of current dollars)
69.20 77.40
57.20 57.20
CENSUS.................................................... 53.70
102.90 104.80 107.70 115.90120.80
BLS
....................
17.23 18.66 19.39 20.48 20.87
BEA
....................
14.60 14.60 16.40 14.70 17.40
Stat of Income
....................
51.80 54.40
49.00
53.80 51.60
....................
Nat'l AgStat Srvc
Energy
InfoAgency
.................... 90.80 90.40 78.90 56.40 56.40
37.90 38.20
38.10 38.80 43.30
NatCtrHealth
Stat
....................
18.78 18.29 17.29 17.21 17.60
NatCtrEduc
Stat....................
11.87 11.59 10.47 9.07 12.72
HUD-Statistics ....................
Total
................

396.98 408.14

402.25

392.66

1985

1986

1987

85.30
86.50 90.78
125.26 123.78 137.71
21.46
21.20 21.71
19.00 12.30 15.50
58.30
56.20 58.00
60.90 57.70 60.30
42.80 44.60 52.00
17.60 18.20 27.64
11.06 11.35 11.84

415.79 441.69

431.83

475.47

1988

94.84
150.51
21.95
17.80
61.00
61.40
49.00
29.70
11.88
498.08

100
TABLE 13.-BUDGET AUTHORITY FOR MAJOR STATISTICAL AGENCIES, 1980-88-Continued
Fscalyear1980

1981

1982

1983

1984

1985

Operating
budgets
(millions of 1988dollars)
CENSUS.................................................... 77.11 74.95
70.30 81.16
87.44
BLS
....................
147.75 137.32 132.37 135.93136.47
BEA
....................
24.74 24.46
23.83 24.02 23.57
Stat of Income
....................
20.96 19.13 20.16 17.24 19.66
Nat'l AgStat Srvc
....................
70.36 70.50
63.42 60.75 61.46
Energy
InfoAgency
....................
130.38 118.45 96.98 66.15 63.71
NatCtrHealth
Stat
....................
54.71 50.84 53.22 44.45 43.15
NatCtrEduc
Stat
....................
26.97
23.97 21.25 20.18 19.88
HUD-Statistics ....................
17.04 15.19 12.87 10.64
14.37

92.29
135.53
23.22
20.56
63.08
65.89
46.31
19.04
11.97

Total
....................

570.01

534.81

494.40

460.52

469.71

1986

1987

1988

90.87 92.60 94.84
130.04 140.46 150.51
22.27 22.15 21.95
12.92 15.81 17.80
59.04 59.16 61.00
60.61 61.51 61.40
46.85
53.04 49.00
19.12 28.19 29.70
11.92 12.07 11.88

477.89 453.64

484.98

498.08

The remaining three agencies' real budget resources show very
modest increases. BLS, which is responsible for producing such critical information as the CPI and employment and unemployment
statistics, has virtually the same budget in FY88, in real terms, as
in FY80. The BLS budget actually declined approximately 12 percent over the intervening period.
Overall, the operating budgets of the nine major agencies declined nearly 13 percent in real terms between FY80 and FY88. Severely limited budget resources have led to elimination, reduction,
or delay in numerous important programs.
The problem of producing information that is accurate, comprehensive, and timely has been particularly acute with respect to
trade despite the urgency of the task. The broader question of assuring the highest professional standards in Federal statistical programs was raised in recent months by proposals from OMB that
would have overridden the judgment of the Census Bureau with respect to the 1990 decennial census. Both issues are discussed below.
Inadequate trade statistics
It should be noted that the Japanese currently issue preliminary
monthly trade statistics within 10 days. In contrast, the first U.S.
reports take roughly six weeks to prepare.
Three different agencies, each with different responsibilities, are
involved in the production of U.S. trade data. They are the Customs Service and, in the Department of Commerce, the Census
Bureau and the Bureau of Economic Analysis (BEA).
There currently exists no systematic and reliable means of recording U.S. exports to other countries. Comparison of U.S. records
of exports to Canada with Canadian records of imports from the
United States reveal very significant statistical discrepancies.
Export records involving other U.S. trading partners have not even
been reconciled.
The Census Bureau compiles import records on the basis of Customs Service data, but antiquated Customs procedures have made
prompt and accurate compilation difficult. As a result, until recently a substantial proportion of imports in any given month were reported in a later month, thereby making monthly figures unreliable. To address the monthly import carry-over problem without

101

requiring a change in Customs Service procedures, the administration determined that release of the monthly data would be delayed
by two weeks. In effect, timeliness was sacrificed in an effort to
assure greater accuracy.
Monthly figures compiled by the Census Bureau have not been
seasonably adjusted since 1985, while quarterly figures published
by the BEA are regularly corrected for seasonal shifts. The monthly figures are therefore more timely and widely quoted, but less accurate. The quarterly figures, while more accurate, are less timely
and receive considerably less attention.
The 1990 Decennial Census
Recent administration efforts to reduce significantly both the
questionnaire and the sample size for the 1990 decennial census
have dramatically underscored concerns about the commitment to
assure the traditional high quality of the Federal statistical infrastructure.
The OMB directive to cut the census by reducing the sample size
and eliminating approximately one-third of the questions-including virtually all questions related to housing-was in clear conflict
with the recommendations of the Bureau of the Census. In the face
of vigorous, widespread, and persistent criticism from state and
local governments, private sector statistics users, and professionals
in the statistics field, the OMB directive was recently withdrawn.
The questionnaire and procedures used in carrying out the 1990
census will reflect the professional judgment of the Census Bureau.
This Committee received unusual voluminous written comment
from numerous sources outlining the consequences of implementing the OMB directive. This correspondence, as well as oral testimony presented at a Committee hearing, was unanimous both in
recommending against the proposed reductions and rejecting the
extraordinary fashion in which the reductions were proposed.
The OMB proposals were as unexpected as they were far-reaching. Preparatory work in connection with the 1990 census began in
1984. A representative of OMB chaired the Federal Agency Council, which was established for the express purpose of developing
census procedures and content. More than half a dozen pretests
were conducted in the 1984-1987 period, all involving questionnaires reviewed and approved by OMB.
Yet the OMB proposals to reduce the number of census questions
and restrict the sample size were forwarded to the Census Bureau
only in July 1987 in connection with the census "Dress Rehearsal"
scheduled for March 1988. As one Regional Planning Council director wrote to the Committee at the time the OMB guidelines were
announced:
The current census format is the product of an extensive
review, refinement, and public outreach program administered by the Census Bureau in recent years. The questionnaire now represents a fair compromise among the various
groups that offered input during the public hearing process. Introducing major changes at this point would violate
that process.

102
The proposed reductions were directed to a broad range of questions, notably those involving housing, energy, commuter information, and employment, and to the size of the sample. Comments received by the Committee with respect to the OMB directive were in
agreement that, if implemented, the directive would have numerous adverse consequences. Those most frequently cited were:
The information base for the next decade, essential for state,
city, community, and private sector use in critical matters
from traffice engineering to housing programs to market analysis, would be seriously restricted and responsible planning
made more difficult;
The central role of the decennnial census as the benchmark
for other important surveys would be undermined;
The identification and analysis of continuing trends, which
requires comparison of information from both the 1980 and
1990 census, would be impaired;
The reliability of data for any small area or group, including
neighborhoods, traffice analysis zones, rural communities, minority groups, and the elderly population, would be reduced.
Correspondents and witnesses also united in rejecting the OMB
contention that census information could be obtained from other
sources. In the view of the National Governors Association, "OMB
cites the fact that there are alternative sources available for obtaining the data in the questions proposed for deletion. We believe
that there are no adequate substitutes for these data."
The recent debate over the 1990 census has had implications
reaching beyond the census itself to the broader question of the statistical infrastructure. The issues were well summarized in the separate observations of a state public works official and of a county
manager. In the words of the former:
If this information is not available from the census, it
will be necessary to turn to our own data collection programs. The expenditures of local, state and Federal funds
for such efforts will overwhelm any cost reduction to the
census. They will also produce poorer results. ...
The county manager wrote:
Finally, we offer a general observation. Over the past
several years, the Federal Government has discontinued a
number of statistical publications and reports. At the same
time Federal funding has been reduced or terminated for
many programs and more responsibilities placed at the
state and local levels. Proper planning and management
requires good data and information, much of which has
historically been available from the census. If anything, an
argument could be made that more data should be collected by the census, not less.
The Federal statistical infrastructure will play a pivotal role in
our efforts to meet the challenges facing the economy. Recent developments serve to underscore the importance of assuring adequate budget resources for, and reaffirming the professional integrity of, our statistical programs.

103
RESEARCH AND DEVELOPMENT

The strength of the U.S. economy depends on a vigorous technological base. Investment in R&DA is an investment in America's
future economic growth. In his testimony before the Joint Economic Committee, Director Erich Bloch of the National Science Foundation observed that in the postwar period, "the growth in the
world economy has been in areas created by scientific discoveries
and engineering innovations and inventions."
Although much R&D in the United States is undertaken by educational institutions and private businesses, the Federal Government plays a critical role by supporting investment in R&D. The
government's role is especially important in funding basic research
where the financial benefits can be too far off in the future or too
widely diffused to be undertaken by the private sector. In such
cases the private sector will invest too little in basic research, requiring assistance from the Federal government to ensure that
such research is performed.
Federal investment in R&D helped contribute to the dynamic
growth of the economy during the postwar decades. During the
1980's, however, changes that have occurred in the level and composition pf Federal R&D spending may result in a long-term erosion of ou'r technological base. These changes include a shift in Federal R&D spending to military uses and a decline in the fraction of
Federal R&D spending for basic research.
Shifts in the composition of FederalR&D funding
Several important changes have occurred during this decade in
Federal expenditures on R&D. Federal spending for military R&D
doubled between FY80 and FY88 in real terms while investment in
nondefense R&D actually declined. This resulted in a dramatic
shift in the composition of Federal investment in R&D. From the
mid-1960's until 1980, the Federal Government allocated roughly
half of its R&D expenditures to defense and half to nondefense
(Figure 83). This balance has been shifting sharply since 1980, and
in 1988 over 67 percent of Federal funds for R&D were spent on
military projects.

104
FIGURE 83
Percent of Federal R&D Funds
for Nondefense Purposes
52%
51%
49%46%

47%
40%
45%
44%
42%
41%
40%:
30%37%:

36%
34%

33%
32%

31%
30%

19I5 1967 19We 1971

1973 1975 1977 1979 1961

1963 196

1967

Another important change is the shrinking portion of Federal
R&D expenditures devoted to basic research. Basic research is research performed to gain a fuller understanding of the fundamentals of science and technology. The focus on fundamental knowledge makes the results from basic research relevant to a large
number of products and processes. Because basic research is not
tied to any specific products or processes, industry is less apt to
perform it, making Federal support for basic research more important.
Basic research as a portion of Federal R&D has been dropping
since 1980. The major reason is the shift of R&D resources into
DOD since most of its R&D spending is devoted to development
rather than basic or applied research.
Finally, the potential for spinoffs from defense R&D to civilian
technology has been shrinking. The increased complexity of
modern weapon systems has forced defense R&D to focus increasingly on products and processes that have few civilian applications.
As Dr. Bloch testified, "the fallout from the defense sector into the
civilian sector is no longer as pronounced as it was at one time."
Furthermore, according to Dr. Bloch, there are many areas of advanced technology where civilian R&D leads the defense sector, including semiconductors, microcomputers, and biotechnology. As defense absorbs a rising share of Federal R&D spending, fewer civilian benefits can thus be expected.
U.S. scientific and technical labor force
The quantity and quality of U.S. students studying to be scientists and engineers is another area that may present problems for
the United States. The United States is not producing technical
personnel at a rate comparable to that of its competitors. Japan
awards 15 percent more first degrees in engineering than the

105
United States even though their population is roughly half that of
the United States. In 1982, 6 percent of all first degrees awarded in
the United States were in engineering, while in Japan 19 percent
of all first degrees were in engineering. Although the United States
still retains a higher number of scientists and engineers per capita
than Japan, the gap is disappearing. Furthermore, in the United
States both defense and civilian projects compete for the technical
personnel, while in Japan they are almost entirely used in civilian
projects. Concern over the quality of U.S. students comes from
widespread agreement among professionals working in the field
that the best academic students are now less likely to be attracted
to research careers.
If the United States attempts to increase the number of scientists
and engineering students, women and minority students are a
likely source for new recruits. Blacks, women, and Hispanics continue to be underrepresented in the student population, and graduate engineering enrollment has been maintained only with increasing numbers of foreign students. One-quarter of the Nation's science and engineering degrees are now awarded to non-U.S. nationals; in engineering the number is more than one-half. About 60
percent of the foreign students stay in the United States, thereby
filling a worrisome gap in trained personnel.
The effect on U.S. competitiveness
There are many indications that U.S. technological dominance
has already begun to decline. U.S. patents awarded to U.S. inventors rose only slightly in number from 46,000 in 1970 to 48,000 in
1987, while the number of U.S. patents awarded to foreign inventors more than doubled from 20,000 to 41,000 during the same
period. The portion of scientific and technical articles published
worldwide that were authored by American has shown a similar
trend.
The relative decline in U.S. performance is due in part to increased R&D spending abroad. West Germany and Japan in particular have recognized the importance of R&D to their future economic growth. West Germany has increased the share of its GNP
spent on R&D by 30 percent between 1970 and 1985; and Japan has
increased its share of GNP spent on R&D even more quickly, by 50
percent in the same period. With this rapid growth in expenditure,
the West Germans and Japanese now spend roughly the same percent of their GNP on R&D (2.7 percent) as the United States (see
Figure 84).

106
FIGURE 84
R&D Expenditures as a Percent of GNP
DAN

19

ad Nondfenm

1IM6 1960 1970 1972 1974 1976 1078 1980

However, and most important, while West Germany and Japan
devote the same percent of their GNP to total R&D, they spend a
much larger share of their R&D budget on nondefense projects
than does the United States. Since 1980, U.S. investment in civilian
R&D has remained constant, roughly 1.8 to 1.9 percent of GNP (see
Figure 85). In contrast West Germany's investment in nondefense
R&D increased 13 percent between 1980 and 1986 and Japan's investment increased more than 27 percent. Both of these countries
are now investing between 2.6 and 2.8 percent of their GNP in nondefense R&D, roughly half again as much as the United States.
This disturbing trend has bolstered doubts about the U.S. ability to
compete over the longer term in international markets.

107
FIGURE 85
Nondefense R&D as a Paent of GNP
2.7
2.7

2A22 2.4

WO Gem

-

--

2.3-

1.01.8
1.9- '__

,,-----_____,'

1071 1072117317410751977197a1t97tNt011

0i29at9i41uIb

Another area of concern for the United States is that foreign
competitors seem to make better use of R&D than their U.S. counterparts. In recent testimony before the JEC, Professor Edwin
Mansfield of the University of Pennsylvania presented the disturbing results of a two-year study that examined contrasting patterns
of technology development in the United States and Japan. The
study found:
U.S. companies outperform the Japanese at the task of developing new products from the results of basic R&D, but the Japanese
excell at introducing new products more quickly and cheaply than
do American firms.
The Japanese are better than Americans at developing new products and processes based on external, borrowed technology. The
Japanese do not necessarily borrow more than Americans do, they
are just more efficient in commercializing what they do borrow.
When the research for new products is generated internally, the
Japanese and Americans are about equal in developing new products.
When borrowing technology, the Japanese do not simply imitate.
Instead, they make significant technological enhancements to the
product or cut its production costs substantially. By contrast, when
American firms imitate, they tend to focus on marketing strategies
rather than product improvement to differentiate one firm's product from another's.
When introducing new products, American firms far outspend
the Japanese on marketing costs, while the Japanese emphasize enhancing the technical performance of their products and keeping
down production costs.
In contrast to American firms, which allocate about two-thirds of
their R&D expenditures to the task of improving products and only
one-third to the task of improving the manufacturing process, the

108
Japanese make just the opposite allocation. In this way, the Japanese make major advancements in both cost and quality of products.
ENERGY SECURITY

World and domestic energy markets have been marked by dramatic volatility during the 1980's as OPEC maintained an uncertain command of world oil markets. The adverse impact on domestic producers of gyrating world oil prices has been compounded by
an energy policy, or more accurately put an absence of policy,
which has destabilized domestic production, discouraged exploration for new fossil fuel resources, and reduced domestic proved oil
reserves to the lowest level since 1950. Coupled with administration
steps to curtail energy conservation programs and stronger demand
for oil across the globe, these trends have significantly increased
the vulnerability of the United States to an economic dislocation
comparable to the 1973 embargo. Indeed, if the latest Department
of Energy projections of worldwide demand and supply are to be
believed, by 1990 OPEC will regain the same dominant position in
world oil markets that it was able to exploit with such devastation
in the 1970's.
Volatile prices and fallingproduction
OPEC oil is the marginal barrel of oil worldwide and determines
world prices, but warfare between Iran and Iraq has undercut
OPEC efforts to limit oil production and maximize producer income
in the 1980's through higher prices. Indeed, since peaking in 1981
at $37.05 per barrel, cheating on production ceilings by OPEC
members caused the average U.S. refiner acquisition cost of imported oil to drop to $26.99 per barrel by 1985. Unsuccessful efforts
within OPEC to discourage cheating caused prices to plunge further, to an average $13.98 per barrel in 1986 before prices rose to
nearly $20 per barrel during the past peak summer driving period.
Continued cheating within OPEC has caused prices to slump noticeably again over the winter, however.
These price gyrations have wreaked havoc on domestic oil firms,
producing a wave of layoffs and budget curtailments across the industry over the past two years. Unemployment among some industry specialists like geologists rose past 30 percent, and oil-producing
states like Texas were plunged into recessions. Domestic producers
and their creditors remain skeptical about prospects for resolving
OPEC price instability-instability which is hobbling both current
and future U.S. oil production prospects.
After rising steadily since 1979, domestic oil production peaked
in 1985. With small-capacity "stripper" well output dwindling as
prices plunged, U.S. production fell 3.2 percent (347,000 barrels per
day) in 1986 and an even larger 4.5 percent last year, according to
the American Petroleum Institute, to the lowest level since 1977.
The administration viewed the operations of volatile world oil
markets benignly during its first seven years in office. Real and
nominal oil prices were declining, producing an immediate windfall
gain to consumers, particularly in 1986 and 1987, and calming inflation fears. This detached approach has continued despite the

109
growing evidence that market instability is dramatically heightening U.S. vulnerability.
Oil exploration activity has slumped even more dramatically
than production itself as prices have fallen. The number of crews
engaged in seismic exploration, for example, fell by nearly half in
1986-the steepest one-year drop on record-and slumped a further
15 percent last year. The number of exploratory and developmental
wells completed in 1987 was down 60 percent from 1985. The 27,000
wells drilled last year-a third of which were dry holes-were the
lowest number drilled since 1974. The CRS has projected that the
weak exploratory performance last year added only 1.3 billion barrels to U.S. proved oil reserves, the smallest addition since 1977.
Domestic output declined in 1987. Even so, the 1.3 billion barrel
added to proved reserves was so weak that total U.S. proved oil reserves slumped to 25.4 billion barrels, the lowest since 1950. The
drastic fall in proved reserves in 1986 and 1987 contrasts with earlier years. Robust exploration had added to total proved reserves in
1984 and held them steady in 1985. But the domestic industry
found replacements for less than one-half the quantity of oil
pumped in 1986, and in 1987 barely two new barrels of oil were discovered for every five barrels pumped from the ground. The fall in
reserves over the last two years is the steepest on record. As noted
in Table 14, proved reserves have fallen more in the last two years
than they have in the preceding seven years.
TABLE 14.-UNITED STATES PROVED PETROLEUM RESERVES
[Million
barrels]
Total
U.S.wells
completed

Year
1947 ....................................
1955 ....................................
1965....................................
1975 ....................................
1980 ....................................
1981 ....................................
1982 ....................................
1983....................................
1984 .
1985 ....................................
1986 ....................................
1987....................................

Produc- Reserve Proved
ton
d
additions reserves

3
0,840
55,917
2,419
39,501
2,686
38,880
2,886
69,840
2,975
90,030
2,949
83,340
2,950
75,030
3,020
84,360
3,037
69,130
3,052
37,420
2,973
27,000
2,821

1,850
2,465
2,871
3,048
1,318
2,970
2,570
1,382
2,897
3,748
3,022
1,446
1,301

21,488
30,012
31,352
32,682
29,805
29,426
27,858
27,735
28,446
28,416
26,889
25,821

Exploratory
anddevelopment
wells.
Excluding
natural
gasliquids.
Source:
Congressional
Research
Service.

Reserve additions and domestic exploration activity are strong
predictors of future oil output. The downward trend in both variables since 1985 has led industry analysts to project a continued
slide in domestic oil production. Even the traditionally optimistic
Department of Energy has agreed, projecting that U.S. oil output
will fall one-third by 1995 under the current price regime. Most
private forecasters are considerably more pessimistic because producers remain leery of continued price volatility.

110

Moreover, exploration and development of oil resources is a
lengthy process; any marked recovery of oil prices followed by a
period of stability will produce a turnaround in oil production only
with considerable lag. The experience following the 1973 embargo
is instructive here. The collapse of domestic exploration and production since 1985 resembles industry experience before 1973.
While domestic exploration activity increased sharply in the mid1970's as world oil prices strengthened, it took the domestic industry four years merely to stem the decline in output. Production
inched up only slowly thereafter and never did regain the 1973 production peak before the collapse began in 1986.
Rising imports
The demand side of the oil equation has swelled with the continuing economic expansion. Annual increases in demand have
averaged between 1 and 3 percent since 1983, with demand last
year up 1.8 percent to top 16.6 million barrels daily. The growth in
domestic demand has exceeded all expectations, with demand last
year nearly hitting levels not predicted by the Department of
Energy to occur until 1990.
With demand up briskly and production dwindling, the gap to be
filled with imports has risen dramatically since 1985. U.S. oil imports on a net basis last year were 35 percent higher than in 1985.
Last year, imports provided nearly 40 percent of total U.S. oil consumption, up from only 27 percent in 1985, and dependence exceeded 44 percent in the peak driving months last summer.
Virtually every public and private forecast now predicts that the
U.S. economy will be dependent on foreign supplies for more than
one-half its petroleum within a handful of years. Under the current
price regime, for example, the Department of Energy projects that
imports will exceed domestic output by 1993, and by 1995 will top
57 percent of consumption. Other forecasters, including the CRS
and the American Petroleum Instittue, expect the crossover to
occur sooner, perhaps as early as 1990.
Vulnerability of OPEC
Rising oil imports need not translate directly into heightened
vulnerability if they originate with traditional supplies like
Canada, Mexico, and Venezuela, nonparticipants in the 1973 OPEC
embargo. But the massive surge of imports since 1986 has overwhelmed the capacity of these traditional neighboring producers to
satisfy U.S. demand, even if all their exports were purchased by
U.S. consumers. As the only producer with excess capacity worldwide, OPEC has filled the U.S. import gap, providing nearly 9 of
every 10 new U.S. import barrels since 1985. This has boosted U.S.
imports OPEC oil by nearly half, to 17 percent of total U.S. consumption. Since OPEC currently provides virtually all new U.S. oil
imports, the rising tide of imports translates directly into a sharply
higher level of U.S. vulnerability.
Vulnerability to oil shocks is increasing even more sharply
abroad. Demand for oil in Europe, Japan, Canada, and the developing world of some 29 million barrels per day is about double the
U.S. level. Total non-OPEC production-even including net exports
from the Soviet Union and other centrally planned economies-

ill

barely meets one-half that demand. Taken in isolation, Europe produces four million barrels a day, according to the Department of
Energy, sufficient to satisfy barely a third of its daily demand of 12
million barrels.
OPEC provided 56 percent of world oil production in 1973, most
from low-cost Middle East fields, and utilized about 80 percent of
its capacity to do so. But the many-fold explosion of world oil prices
following the 1973 embargo sparked a renaissance in non-OPEC oil
production. Promising and costly provinces free of OPEC influence
across the globe were scoured and exploited. As a result non-OPEC
production soared 50 percent in the 1970's as nations like the
United Kingdom and Norway became major producers at the
higher OPEC prices. By 1985, OPEC's share of world production
had dwindled to only 30 percent, with total OPEC production down
one-half from a decade earlier, and only 60 percent of OPEC capacity utilized.
Resource limits for most known non-OPEC oil soures are now apparent, however, and few prospects currently exist for substantial
further increases in production in the years ahead. A significant
share of the new non-OPEC production introduced following the
1973 oil shock was high-cost capacity from offshore and so-called
frontier regions. Stagnant or declining production in most of these
maturing areas is forecast for the years immediately ahead by the
Department of Energy (Table 15).
TABLE 15.-OPEC CAPACITY UTILIZATION
Capacity
rate Import
price
(percent) (perbarrel)'
1970
.................................................................
1971
................................................................
1972
,........,.
,
,
1973
.................................................................
1974
.........
1975
................................................................
1976
................................................................
1977
.................................................................
1978
................................................................
1979
................................................................
1980
................................................................
1981
.................................................................
1982
...........
1983
................................................................
1984
.................................................................

62
67
70
80

.......
.80

70
80
83
81
90
90
8
70
65
65

1985
..........................................
1986
...........................................

60
65

1990
.....................................................................................................
1995......................................................................,

282
.

........

1

$2.96
3.17
3.22
4.08
12.52
13.93
13.48
14.53
14.57
21.67
33.89
37.05
33.55
29.30
28.88

26.99
13.98

.................

2 90

Refiner
acquisition
cost.
Department
of Energy
projection
Source:
Department
ofEnergy.
2

Overall, non-OPEC production at present price levels is projected
by the Department of Energy to fall nearly 20 percent between
1985 and 1995, or by more than five million barrels daily, even
though worldwide oil demand is projected to rise by 6.6 million barrels per day.

112
Oil and the trade balance
The preciptious 50 percent decline of imported oil prices during
early 1986 reduced the adverse impact of oil imports on the U.S.
trade balance. Overall, crude petroleum and product imports of
$37.6 billion in 1986 represented an amount comparable to 24 percent of the U.S. trade deficit that year. Oil import prices rebounded
modestly last year, and coupled with the 3 percent increase in
import volume, the value of oil imports jumped 20 percent to $45
billion-double the rate for all imports and representing 26 percent
of the 1987 trade deficit. With oil imports projected to continue
rising as U.S. oil dependence increaes, petroleum imports will increasing offset improvements in the merchandise trade balance and
exacerbate pressure from U.S. consumers on world capital markets.
The risk of oil shock
Steadily rising dependence of OPEC carries with it the risk of a
repetition of the shortages and skyrocketing fuel prices with weakened Western economies in the 1970's. The most significant precondition to a return of OPEC market dominance is its own rate of capacity utilization. As noted in Table 15, the 1973 embargo and subsequent oil price escalation through 1981 coincided with an OPEC
rate of capacity utilization exceeding 80 percent.
The Department of Energy is projecting that, based on demand
trends and shrinking non-OPEC production summarized in Table
16, OPEC will once again reach that rate of capacity use in the
next two to three years.
TABLE 16.-NON-OPEC PETROLEUM PRODUCTION AND WORLD DEMAND
[Millionbarrels]

supply
Non-OPEC
Stated

Europe

Other'

11.2
9.2
78.6

4.3
3.7
3.2

13.0
12.6
12.5

Year:
1985 ....................................
1990 ....................................
1995 ....................................

Total

World

28.5
25.5
23.3

46.4
50.4
53.0

economies.
nationsandcentrally-planned
developing
Non-OPEC
Oceania,
Canada,
of Energy.Thesedata includeall refinerygains and naturalgas liquids as well as crude oil production.
Source:Department

OPEC-engineered supply shortfalls in the 1970"s were transitory,
but the impact of the 1200 percent OPEC price hikes was dramatic
and sustained as the effects swept through the world economy, substantially eroding real incomes. In the United States, the higher
OPEC prices precipitated a steep recession, cutting GNP growth by
0.5 percent in 1974 and 1.3 percent in 1975. Soaring oil prices also
played a major role in the milder 1980 recession as well.
The severe recession following the 1973 embargo has been extensively examined by George Perry of the Brookings Institution and
others. The CRS has updated several of the Perry analyses, which
used both the Federal Reserve econometric model and a different
model at the University of Michigan, in an effort to simulate the
impact in current dollars should an oil shock recur.

113
Table 17 projects the costs of an oil price shock. GNP growth
could drop 1.5-1.9 percentage points this year, and another 1.0-2.2
percentage points of growth next year, representing more than half
a trillion dollars in foregone output. Unemployment could rise as
much as 2.2 percentage points, increasing unemployment by 2.5
million persons.
TABLE 17.-IMPACT OF AN OPEC OIL PRICE SHOCK IN1987 1988-1991
[Inpercent]
Model

GNP
Loss

Unemployment
Increase

1988 1989 1988 1989 1990
Perry/FRB
....
Perry/Mich. ...

1.9
1.5

1.0
2.2

0.8
.4

1.3
1.4

1.8
1.8

1991
2.2
1.5

Source:
Congressional
Research
Service.

Policy options
Numerous opportunities to fend off or even avoid rising dependence on OPEC exist, involving the demand as well as the supply
side of the energy equation.
IX. CONCLUSION
American economic policy was sharply transformed during the
1980's. In retrospect, it is clear that most of the radical departures
in economic policy implemented during this period did not live up
to expectations: growth did not accelerate, investment did not rise,
savings fell, budget and trade deficits soared, and productivity
growth remained lackluster.
It is also clear that the changes of the 1980's have left a series of
important economic problems which will be the focus of future debates on economic policy. The Federal fiscal deficit is only the most
obvious of a series of problems growing out of excessive debt accumulation and increased fragility in the financial sector. The U.S.
trade deficit is only the most visible of the enormous imbalances in
the world economy which threaten global trade and global prosperity. Reducing both these deficits will be a difficult task, at best, and
could turn into a real hardship if either the U.S. or world economies were to experience a recession during this period of adjustment.
Working our way out of the problems posed by the budget and
trade deficits in a steady and responsible manner will be impeded
by other "deficits" which have grown during the 1980's. We face a
major deficit in investment in manufacturing. We face a "deficit"
in civilian R&D, as compared with a number of other key industrial countries. We face a "deficit" in the Nation's physical infrastructure in the form of a deteriorating transportation network and antiquated water and sewer systems. We have a serious deficit of information about our economy and the economies of our competitors
due to inadequate support of Federal statisical programs. Perhaps
most important we face a serious "deficit" in our stock of human
capital, following years of neglect of education and skill-training
for the American work force.

114
But we will also carry forward into the 1990's a deficit in social
cohesion which is a major legacy of the past seven years. Through
both the recession and the recovery, economic policies have worked
to widen the inequalities among our citizens. Many facilies have
been hard-pressed to make ends meet, while others have experienced generous income growth. The result has been widening of
the income gap between families unique in the post-World War II
period.
THE CHALLENGE OF THE 1990'S

These critical deficits were build up over a number of years.
They will not be rectified quickly. Next year, a new administration
will take over the task of managing American economic policy. Of
necessity, this new administration will need to review the performance of the past and attempt to shape a new set of policies designed
to meet the challenges of the 1990's. The consequences of current
policy, outlined in this Report, mean that new directions must be
found to meet these challenges effectively.
As this Report has indicated, we face two major economic challenges. They are difficult and compelx. The first is to rectify the
extraordinary economic imbalances that have developed in recent
years and to rebuild the sense of sociai cohesion and economic justice which has traditionally been an American trademark.
The second is to find effective ways of responding to the new realities of international economic competition and world market integration. The strength of our position in the international economy cannot be separated from the strength of our domestic economy, and therefore we must address our domestic investment deficits in order to enhance our competitive ability. Furthermore, our
new status as a debtor nation has already weakended our bargaining position in international negotiations. Improvement in our
international position is unlikely without new initiatives in the
areas of international debt, monetary reform, a more equitable
sharing of the burdens of maintining world military and economic
security, and sustained worldwide economic growth.
These two broad challenges lead to a number of specific principles which, in the Committee's view, should shape the future
debate on economic policy. A number of these recommendations
have been made in previous Annual Reports. They deserve to be
reemphasized in the context of the new economic policy debate
which will take place with the advent of a new administation.
1. Reducing the Federal deficit must be a major national economic priority. In pursuing the vital objectives of deficit reduction it is
important not to neglect other priorities. The route to credible and
sustained deficit reduction must also pay adequate attention to
needed investments in our economic future.
2. Major changes in our trade performance are required over the
next decade. The trade balance must improve sharply in order to
compensate for a growing interest-payment burden on our foreign
debt and to stabilize and reduce that external debt. This task will
fall largely on the manufacturing sector, which will need a substantial acceleration in both productivity and capital formation as

115
well as appropriate exchange rates and a stable international monetary environment.
3. Monetary policy is heavily constrained by the legacy of the
past macroeconomic imbalances. The Federal Reserve must maintain adequate domestic economic growth, while providing credibility in international capital markets with respect to the value of the
dollar and the rate of inflation in the United States. Substantial
progress on reducing the budget and trade deficits will be necessary to ease this complex task for the monetary authorities.
4. Improvements in trade will require improvements in both the
content and the administration of American trade law. Effective
measures are needed to open world markets and keep both world
and American exports growing at a healthy pace.
5. Strong domestic growth has been inhibited by heavy burdens
for international military and economic security. Achieving a responsible redistribution of these international obligations commensurate with relative economic strengths of Alliance members must
be a major policy objective for the future.
6. The growing integration of the U.S. economy into the broader
world economy increases the need for effective American economic
diplomacy. Multilateral agreements are needed on fiscal and economic policy coordination, mechanisms for maintaining overall
world growth, and strengthening multilateral economic and financial institutions.
7. The Third World debt problem continues to be a major strain
on the world economy and a threat to financial stability. Debtor
countries need improved abilities to finance their internal growth,
and the world economy needs expanding markets in the developing
nations. Comprehensive and multilateral solutions to the debt
crisis must replace the present piecemeal approach to this problem.
8. America s growing dependence on international sources of
energy creates substantial threats to our economic stability. Increased vulnerability to external price shocks or supply interruptions is a serious economic liability which stems directly from current policies. Energy self-sufficiency should be a priority concern of
economic policy in the 1990's.
9. The rapid deteriorations of the farm economy during the
1980's continues to hamper overall economic growth and serves to
worsen regional inequalities. Revitalizing agriculture has the potential both to improve income and employment in much of rural
America and to reduce the U.S. trade deficit; it will require concerted efforts to rebuild export markets and take advantage of
America's comparative advantage in agricultural production.
10. Future economic growth depends on expanded investment by
both the private and public sectors. Public initiatives are needed to
improve the quality of education and the skills of the work force,
restore the Nation s physical infrastructure, and expand research
and development.
11. Accurate and timely information about the economy is essential for effective policymaking. Renewed attention must be paid to
strengthening the Federasl statisital agencies and safeguarding the
integrity of the statistical information base.
12. Finanical innovation has helped to create a climate of uncertainty and potential instability in both domestic and international

116
captial markets. There is an urgent need for a comprehensive reexamination of policies affecting captial markets in order to assure
both market efficiency and improved coordinations of policies
across markets.

ADDITIONAL VIEWS OF SENATOR LLOYD BENTSEN
I congratulate Chairman Sarbanes and the staff of the Joint Economic Committee for producing a broad review of economic events
during this debate. The Report presents a distinctive perspective on
these events. And while I do not agree with some aspects of this
presentation, the Committee deserves credit for exploring the unprecedented challenges to our prosperity posed by the twin trade
and budget deficits. These Additional Views clarify some of the
areas where my own views differ from those presented in this
Report.
Defense preparedness: I supported administration steps this
decade to enhance military preparedness, and am not convinced
that they inhibited economic growth. Those steps have generally
been successful enough to now set the stage for a modest slowdown
in the pace of defense spending. That is why I endorsed the President's decision during negotiations leading to the budget compromise last December to hold the growth of defense spending over
the next several years to the level of inflation.
Budget deficit and spending The Report correctly notes the debilitating economic impact of the enormous budget deficits incurred
during this decade. Our Nation will long bear the burden of relatively weak real income growth due to these deficits, which have
risen to unprecedented levels, and hobbled capital formation and
productivity growth. Steps to shrink these deficits included controls
on Federal spending. And the Report contends that a variety of
Federal responsibilities have been short-changed in recent years as
a consequence, including worker training and retraining, highways
and bridge maintenance, and literacy programs. Spending levels on
health, air safety, civilian research and development, and education are criticized as well. I do not completely agree with this criticism. The budget crisis poses a real danger to our national economic health, and restrained Federal spending is the key to resolving
that crisis.
Third World debt: Shrinking the Federal budget deficit will
reduce interest rates and ease the debt crisis confronting the developing nations as well. As I indicated in my Additional Views in the
1987 Annual Report, rapid progress in shrinking the Federal deficit
may avoid the need for an elaborate multilateral approach to this
problem.
Internationaleconomic coordination: Growing interdependence of
the world economy has heightened the dangers to our economy of
unilateral economic policy actions abroad. A more extenisve exchange of information between major industrialized nations can
strengthen the world economy. But I oppose the creation of binding
multilateral agreements with foreign nations which would hamper
domestic economic policy. Moreover, the Federal budget deficit
(117)

118
crisis should take priority over steps to financially strengthen multilateral economic and financial institutions.
Economic equality: The Report suggests that income equality has
eroded this decade due to stagnating real incomes for workers, perhaps even exacerbated by income tax law changes. That conclusion
is controversial, especially since the 1986 tax reforms benefited millions of lower income families who were removed altogether from
income tax rolls. The solution to questions of income equality is
economic growth. Debates over how to achieve a growing economic
pie are preferable to debates over how thinly to slice a stagnant
one. One sure way to accelerate economic growth is to expand exports and the high-wage jobs which go with them. For that reason,
the Report's criticism of the vacuum in administration trade policy
is appropriate. The Report cited Bureau of Labor Statistics data
showing that 3.4 million jobs in the high-wage manufacturing,
mining, transportation, and communication sectors were lost between 1979 and 1985 while 3.5 million jobs in the low-wage service
sector were created. The deepening trade deficit played a prominent role in that job deterioration. And rapidly restoring balanced
trade through dramatic gains in exports-which is a key goal of
the trade reform legislation enacted by this Congress-is a major
answer to the debate over issues of income equality.
Energy: The Report correctly notes that "America's growing dependence on international sources of energy creates substantial
threats to our economic stability." Continued progress toward efficiency in energy use is important, but steps to stabilize oil prices
and boost conventional domestic oil and gas production are critical
to stemming rising American dependence on OPEC oil. Foremost
among these steps would be an oil import fee to replace uncertainty and price volatility in the Oil Patch with predictability for oil
exploration and production. Repeal of the misnamed windfall profits tax is appropriate as well to remove a major disincentive hobbling producers. The Committee's support for enhanced oil recovery research is appropriate. A national energy policy designed
around a muscular oil extraction technology research effort is
needed to capture the billions of barrels remaining in high-cost reservoirs throughout America, and open a sure path to greater
energy independence.

ADDITIONAL VIEWS OF REPRESENTATIVE AUGUSTUS F.
HAWKINS
I commend Senator Sarbanes, the JEC staff, and the other Members of the Committee for producing a comprehensive and accurate
analysis of the American economy in the 1980's. This Report is
right on target. In an unbiased way, it clearly shows the true
extent and depth of the economic consequences of seven and a half
years of unbalanced economic growth, and skewed national priorities.

While I totally agree with the Report's analysis that substantiates the need\for a reordering of present priorities and policies, I
am disappointed that we do not take the next step, and set forth a
plan to accomplish such alternatives. The Employment Act of 1946,
as amended by the Full Employment and Balanced Growth Act of
1978, clearly enables the Joint Economic Committee to make very
specific policy and programmatic recommendations to achieve balanced economic growth through pursuing policies that result in full
employment and price stability.
The statute establishes a goal-setting procedure to be the vehicle
for recommending policy priorities, and sets timetables for achievement of the goals in order to hold policymakers accountable for
their decisions. The Joint Economic Committee should not hesitate
to include specific policy and programmatic alternatives for reaching 4 percent unemployment and 3 percent inflation in its Annual
Report on the Economic Report of the President. Current economic
circumstances clearly show the need for such action.
As this Report has shown, the unbalanced, uncoordinated economic decisionmaking that has characterized the 1980's has left us
with an economic legacy that will take several years to turn
around. The Joint Economic Committee can and should provide the
leadership for this effort.
(119)

MINORITY VIEWS
REPUBLICAN JOINT ECONOMIC COMMITTEE ANNUAL REPORT
I. INTRODUCTION

The economy is now well into its sixth year of expansion, the
longest peacetime expansion in our history. Inflation is under control and investment is strong. The economy has spawned four million new businesses since 1981 and has shrugged off Black Monday.
Most importantly, the economy has generated 15 million new jobs,
and real median family income has climed 10.7 percent since 1982.
The foundation of any economy is a people at productive work.
Never has the foundation of our economy been stronger.
Republican economic policies have successfully reversed the disastrous trends in inflation, interest rates, unemployment, productivity, poverty, and many others of the late 1970s. Six months ago
in our midyear review of the economy, we Republican Members of
the Joint Economic Committee expressed our serious concerns regarding the trade and budget deficits. Of late, trends in the U.S.
trade deficit have also been encouraging. Unfortunately, the one
remaining major economic challenge-the budget deficit-lies in
the domain of the Congress and out of reach of the rational discipline of competitive free enterprise.
Much has been said-and we expect will continue to be saidabout the declining economic and political stature of the United
States in the world. Advocates of this view lament the diminishing
economic gap between the United States and many developed and
developing nations, such as Japan, South Korea, West Germany,
and Taiwan. We, however, applaud this global cloning of American
democratic capitalism. Even the Soviet Union, some Eastern Bloc
countries, and China are experimenting with the American way.
This movement toward economic parity can only improve the
whole world's standard of living and therefore encourage the propagation of democracy, freedom, and peace. Imitation is a compliment, not a threat.
This rapid replication of competitive economies has changed the
fundamental structure of the world economy. To explain this
changing environment, our report presents a conceptual framework to view emerging U.S. and world economic events. We offer
this discussion in our effort to gain a better understanding of the
evolving nature of the U.S. and world economy. Sound policies require thorough comprehension and insight into the nature of a
more complex world economy, where the consequences of national
policymaking reverberate beyond borders. We do not claim to have
all the answers, but we do believe we have begun to ask some of
the right questions.
(120)

121
11. ECONOMIC REVIEW & OUTLOOK

The current expansion is now well into its sixth year. And very
few professional economic forecasters see this expansion ending in
1988, or in 1989 for that matter. The April 1988 consensus forecasts
of the Blue Chip Indicators, a composite of more than 50 forecasting firms, projects that real gross national product (GNP) will be
up 2.7 percent in 1988 and 2.2 percent in 1989. It is informative to
note that the composite GNP forecast by essentially these same
firms a year ago for 1987 was 2.3 percent. Real GNP actually grew
by 2.9 percent in 1987 (4.0 percent fourth quarter to fourth quarter).
This chapter presents an economic review using an historical
perspective of 12 key economic trends and an economic outlook.
Economic growth
In 1987, the U.S. economy grew with a strength that surprised
almost all forecasters and analysts. Inflation-adjusted gross national product grew at a 4.8 percent annual rate in the fourth quarter,
as the expansion entered its sixth year. Several factors comprise
the current economic growth picture, and the trends are mixed but
positive. First, real exports are up. Posting a $16 billion (1982 dollars) increase in the fourth quarter, exports of goods and services
in 1987 were in the $426 billion range on an annual basis, compared to $377 billion for 1986. Second, real gross domestic purchases increased by almost $100 billion during 1987, benefiting domestic producers even more. While personal consumption expenditures declined by some $20 billion, real gross private domestic investment was up $35.3 billion during the fourth quarter of 1987.
In summary, economic growth in 1987 has been reliant on consumer activity than in previous years. The welcomed increased in
exports and a continuation in investment has made GNP growth
more balanced.
The economic recovery beginning in November 1982 has already
surpassed the peacetime record duration, and shows few if any
signs of weakness. In real terms, GNP has grown at a 4.2 percent
compounded annual rate for the past five years (1982-IV through
1987-IV). That exceeds the most popular benchmarks, such as the 3
percent postwar average or even the 3.8 percent of the 1960s. Our
growth record is even more remarkable given the economic crisis
set off in the late 1970s, which led to a severe cutback in the necessary ingredient for sustained growth-investment.

122
Chad 11.1

REAL GROSS NATIONAL PRODUCT
Percent Change from Previous Year
7
56

4
3
2

0

-2
-3 1978
SOURCE:

1979

1980

1981

1982

1983

1984

1985

1986

1987

Bureau of Eamomio Anais

Dissatisfaction in the stagfiation and malaise of the latter 1970s
contributed to Ronald Reagan's election in 1980. He promised and
delivered new economic policies. Tax rates and excessive regulation
were reduced, providing a firm foundation for economic recovery.
Once these policies took effect, the economy began its remarkable
turnaround. The current economic expansion is far from over. Instead, it offers a solid foundation for future growth and prosperity.
So long as business and consumer confidence is accompanied by
wise public sector leadership, it is likely to continue for years.
Trade performance
International trade has come to occupy an increasingly significant role in the United States, the world's largest economy. Since
1978, U.S. exports have generated between four and five million
new jobs for American workers, while strong consumer and business demand in the U.S. has triggered huge import surges into the
country.
The U.S. trade position-the balance between exports and imports-has also changed dramatically since the late 1970s, moving
from net merchandise imports of about $42 billion in 1978 to this
year's projected deficit of between $165 and $170 billion. Why the
change? The most significant reason is to be found in divergent
growth patterns separating the United States and its trade partners. Compared with the rest of the world, U.S. economic performance has been impressive throughout most of this decade. As a
result of our expansion, the United States helped pull the rest of
the world out of deep recession by providing a vital market for developed and developing country exports. Over the past six years,
most of our partners have relied on export sales to the United
States for between one-quarer and one-half of their domestic
growth.
With improving rates of world economic growth, the United
States will return to balance in its trade account. In terms of sheer

123
volume, our exports have actually been rising since the end of 1984
at an annual rate of 5 to 10 percent. They should continue to do so:
At lower-dollar exchange rates, these volume gains translate into
corresponding dollar earnings-through a continued growth in U.S.
export volumes, particularly in the agricultural, high tech, and
consumer goods sectors, where the United States continues to enjoy
a comparative and competitive advantage.
The past decade has witnessed a steep rise in the U.S. trade deficit, with the largest jump occurring between 1983 and 1984, the
rate of increase in the U.S. trade deficit has been falling. Despite
continued import demand and weak overseas expansion, there was
little change in the overall magnitude in the U.S. merchandise
trade deficit between 1986 and 1987.
Chart 11.2

U.S. EXPORTS AND IMPORTS
Billions of Dollars
450400350300

-

Exports Imports

250
200
150
100
50
1978

1979

1980

1981

1982

1983

1984

1985

1986

1987

SOURCE: Commerce Department

The dollar
This country's trade picture has been blamed on many factors including misguided U.S. economic policy, a supposed deteriorating
quality of American exports, and unfair trading practices by other
nations. The most important factor, however, was the relative price
increases of U.S. exports due to a 40 percent rise in the value of
the dollar from 1980 to 1985 against the currencies of America's
most important trading partners. According to a Brookings Institution survey of leading economic models, the dollar appreciation
caused up to three-quarters of the shift in the U.S. current account.
The Congressional Budget Office has testified before the Committee
with similar findings.
- Why was the dollar so strong? Traditional economic theory
argues that exchange rates are determined primarily by changes in
the current account, which would be caused by disparities in
income growth and inflation between the United States and its
trading partners. So a U.S. current account deficit meant an excess
foreign supply of dollars, which should cause a depreciation of the
currency. But in recent years exchange rates have moved inde-

84-405 0 - 88 - 5

124
pendently of and sometimes counter to the current account. As
shown in the accompanying Chart II.3, the dollar continued its
rapid ascent from 1982 to 1985 despite a widening current account
deficit.
Chat 11.3

U.S. CURRENT ACCOUNT & EXCHANGE RATE INDEX
140
120 lExchange Rate Index
100
120 -l
60 40 20 -

20

-20

-40 -Current Account,
it? Billions of Dollars
40-.
-100-

120 -1401601978

1979

1980

1981

1982

1983

1984

1985

1988

1987

SOURCE: Commerce Department

Many analysts now understand the world's foreign exchange
market, and not trade, is the primary determinant of exchange
rates, and demand for dollars by foreign investors during the 1980s
caused the dollar appreciation. One reason for the rising importance of foreign exchange markets is their size. A survey by the
Federal Reserve Bank of New York (U.S. Foreign Exchange
Market Turnover Survey, March 1986) estimates that U.S. foreign
exchange transactions were 10 times the sum of U.S. exports and
imports in 1983. Another reason is that with the general liberalization of foreign exchange controls, especially in Japan and Great
Britain, capital can now flow across borders far more easily than
goods can, which are impeded by trade restrictions. Finally,
demand for Euro-currency assets soared with the acceleration in financial innovations that substantially reduced the costs and risks
of owning them. Demand for dollar assets was particularly strong
during the 1980s and U.S. interest rates, as well as foreign Eurodollar rates, were high because the American economy was characterized by strong growth, low inflation, and an improved taxation
climate.
By early 1985, however, the demand for dollar assets had pushed
the currency to 3.3 West German marks and 250 yen and there was
widespread agreement that the dollar had nowhere to go but down.
The interest rate gap between U.S. dollar-denominated and foreigncurrency assets began to narrow and no longer compensated investors for the risk involved in holding dollars at their exchange rate
peak. As a result, the dollar has fallen over 30 percent from Febru-

125
ary 1985 through October 1987 against the currencies of 15 of
America's trading partners. Furthermore, in September 1985, officials from the Group of Five (G-5) major industrialized countries
agreed to join in coordinated exchange market intervention aimed
at reducing the dollar's exchange rate. The fall occurred notwithstanding attempts such as the Louvre Accord in February 1987 to
stabilize exchange rates.
As long as the U.S. trade balance is the focus of concern, the
world's markets are likely to expect a continued dollar decline. Not
surprisingly, private investment by foreigners in U.S. Treasury securities declined from a net inflow of $10.7 billion during the first
two quarters of 1986 to a net outflow of $4.1 billion during the first
two quarters of 1987. The world's financial markets will continue
to gyrate with any news that indicates an impending dollar decline.
Interest rates
The trend in interest rates is always of concern to businessmen
and investors because of the immediate impact it has for the costs
of carrying inventories and financing capital investment, as well as
for asset values in financial markets. But the trend in interest
rates is also important in interpreting the outlook for the economy
in 1988. It has been found that a year in which interest rates tend
to rise is always followed by a year in which growth in nominal
GNP slows, and that a year in which interest rates tend to fall is
always followed by a year in which growth accelerates.
Following the historical peak in both long- and short-term interest rates in 1981, there has been a marked improvement. The onset
of the 1981-82 recession and the precipitous end of inflationary expectations marked the steepest decline in recent history, from the
peak in long-term Treasury bond rates of 13.9 percent in 1981 to
11.1 percent in 1983. The very strong growth of 1983 and 1984,
however, briefly halted the fall in interest rates. Interest rates
then began to move up once again, but a moderating expansion
since 1984 has reinforced a gradual settling of long-term bond rates
to the 7-8 percent range, which was reached in mid-1986.
Last year saw a great deal of uncertainty in the bond market as
various forecasts of renewed inflation on the horizon, faster economic growth in 1987-88, and unfavorable international trends in
capital movement have become common. From January through
October, 1987, both short-term and long-term interest rates moved
higher. The low of the decade in long Treasury bond rates was 7.08
percent in January 1987, but by mid-October those rates were
above 9.5 percent.

126
Chart 11.4

SHORT & LONGTERM INTEREST RATES
Yearly Average Yields on 3-Month & 10-Year Treasury Issues
15141312

Short Long

10

9
8
7

8
4
3

1978

1979

1980

1981

1982

1983

1984

1985

1986

1987

SOURCE: Treasuy Oepanment

A sharp dip in both short- and long-term interest rates followed
the events in the stock market in mid-October, but it is not clear
whether the rising trend of the first three quarters of 1987 had
been reversed or whether it was merely halted momentarily. The
prime bank lending rate has declined to 8.5 percent, however, and
this seems to portend a downward trend.
Inflation
The crushing of inflation is one of the major achievements of the
Reagan presidency. From a peak in 1979 with double-digit rates of
increase in both consumer prices and the wholesale prices of finished goods, the inflation rate has held steady at 4.5 percent or less
since 1982. The CPI-U was 4.4 percent in 1987.
The dramatically small increases in 1983-85, followed by an
actual decrease in wholesale prices of finished goods in 1986, led to
an increase in the Consumer Price Index in 1986 of only 1.1 percent. Five years of good news on the inflation front, however, has
in itself begun to prompt the question, "how much longer can it
last?" Price experience in 1987 has been interpreted as the beginning of the end, but in fact the rate of increase in both the Consumer Price Index and the Producer Price Index in 1987 just represents a resumption of the 1982-87 trend rate, after the better-thanaverage experience of 1986.

127
Chart 11.5

INFLATION FOR CONSUMERS & PRODUCERS
As measured by the Consumer Price Index & the Producer Price Index
Percent Change from Previous Year
13
12
11
10

9
8

7
6

cPI-u PPI

5

4
3
2
0
-1
-2
1978

1979

1980

1981

1982

1983

1984

1985

1986

1987

SOURCE: Bureau of Labor StatisUcs

There are sufficient reasons to worry about a resumption of inflation with the decline in the foreign exchange value of the U.S.
dollar and the increase in commodity prices that have occurred last
year. A lower dollar in 1987 suggests the U.S. price level will have
to rise more rapidly than the price level in the rest of the world, at
least for internationally traded goods such as oil, minerals, and agricultural products. But over 60 percent of the input to the productive process in the U.S. is labor, and unit labor costs actually declined during 1987 by 3.8 percent. The likelihood that rising commodity prices, or the relative prices of imported goods, will be reflected in a sharp resumption of consumer price increases above
the levels of the past five years is therefore small.
Moreover, the hypothesis that the root cause of inflation is too
much money chasing too few goods is also working in favor of the
slow inflation rate, because the Federal Reserve moderated the
rate of growth in the money supply during 1987.
Monetary Policy
During the 1970s the pervasive, international evidence of a close,
casual relationship between rates of increase in a nation's money
supply and its nominal gross national product became strongly persuasive to policymakers. The increasingly severe inflation of the
1970s heightened this awareness of monetary policy as an important factor. The Humphrey-Hawkins Act of 1978 even imposed a
formal reporting system on the Federal Reserve for monetary
growth targets, although the independence of the Fed to conduct
monetary policy was not impaired.

128
Chart 11.6

MONEY SUPPLY GROWTH
Percent Change from Previous Year
17-

1413-

12
t6t4-

11

Ml M2t1

10

1978

1979

1980

1981

1982

1983

1984

1985

1986

1987

SOURCE: FW*dSro

In October 1979, the Federal Reserve itself espoused the monetarist theory, emphasizing the rate of growth of M-1 or M-2 as one
of its central concerns. This public shift in emphasis provided the
Fed with an important new degree of operating freedom, to allow
interest rates to peak without exciting financial market expectations of added liquidity to moderate them, which would have been
normal under the Fed's procedures as they had been implemented
throughout the postwar era.
As the monetary growth rates in the disinflationary period since
1979 indicate, however, it has not been restraint on the monetary
aggregates that has led to a reduction in inflation. In recent years,
both M-1 and M-2 have continued to grow at annual average rates
substantially the same as during the late 1970s, and have even
grown at double-digit rates in some years. This important change
in the relationship between money supply and nominal GNP, and
between the two components of nominal GNP-the real GNP and
inflationary price increases-has stimulated much productive research among economists both at the Federal Reserve and in the
private sector. The traditional relationship between "transactions
money" and nominal GNP has been found to be as consistent as
ever, but "transactions money" is no longer identifiable as M-1.
The marked slowdown in the monetary measures during 1987 may
not, therefore, reflect an alarming change in Federal Reserve
policy but rather a decline in the demand for non-transactions balances (an increase in the velocity of money, which slowed significantly in the early 1980s), and an accommodation by the Fed to
these changes in money demand.
With the increasing pace of change in financial services, and the
internationalization of currencies and capital markets, an important "measurement problem" has arisen. It is difficult to know

129
what constitutes the relevant money supply for economic policy. Increasingly, moreover, dollar balances in our banking system support transactions overseas and dollar balances overseas finance
capital investment in the United States. The remarkable achievement of the Reagan era in ending inflation and stimulating economic growth consists in shifting the effect of a monetary increase
into more of a real GNP increase and less of a price level increase
than occurred in the 1970s.
Saving

Saving is economically important because it is a major source of
capital formation and economic growth, hence a higher future
standard of living. Saving is often defined simply as the difference
between income and consumption, but economic income is consumption plus the increase in net wealth. Thus, increases in net
wealth can be viewed as saving, even if consumption also goes up.
The Department of Commerce subtracts consumption from disposable personal income to derive the most commonly cited measure of saving. This amount of saving, divided by the amount of disposable income, generates a personal savings rate. Thus, measurements of saving are a residual determined by the amounts of
income and consumption. Any distortion or innaccuracy in measurement of these two aggregates will result in a misleading savings
measure.
Chafl 11.7

INTERNATIONAL SAVING COMPARISONS
Average Annual Rate, 1979-1986
19
18

17-

1615141312-

I1J
1097-

6
5
4

3

2
0

0

U. S.

SOURCE: International
Monetary Fund

Japan

j W.Germiany
Personal Saving

I.

Personal Saving Plus Household Equity Capital Gains

While the measurement of U.S. personal savings in national
income accounts usually compares somewhat unfavorably to that of
other major economies, the inclusion of capital gains into savings
changes the situation considerably. According to the Bank for
International Settlements, this broader definition of savings puts
the United States much closer to Japan and other nations.
Another difficulty with the focus on personal saving is that it
does not include business saving. The addition of business saving

130
clearly is a more accurate measure of total saving. Gross private
domestic saving, which includes business saving, has grown from
$409 billion in 1978 to $674 billion in 1986, an increase of 65 percent. Any strong increase in business saving would tend to be considered by stockholders in determining their plans for personal
saving. For example, a change in the law providing more generous
depreciation rules, such as the Accelerated Cost Recovery System
(ACRS) under the 1981 tax law, permitted firms to retain more
funds for reinvestment. This amounts to an increase in business
saving, which stockholders may regard as an increase in their net
wealth.
Even this approach can be considered unduly narrow. Some
economists have argued that consumer durable expenditures, balances in social security, and pension funds should also be considering saving. The point here is that measurement of saving is subject
to many definitional issues that affect relative national savings
rates. In any event, the United States is not a spendthrift nation as
many would have us believe.
Investment
Investment is the long-term allocation of resources to the production and distribution of goods and services. Our ability to produce,
today and in the future, is directly related to improving the way
we work. Workers are more productive with better tools. Factories
with state-of-the-art assembly lines have greater capacity and efficiency than older ones. And new buildings designed with flexible
modular floor partitions can accommodate the changing technical
demands of modern computer and communications networks. An
economy cannot grow if it does not continuously improve the processes for producing goods and services.
The broadest measure of investment in the U.S. economy is gross
private domestic investment. This figure is the total amount spent
annually for new plant and equipment, business structures, residential investment, and inventory changes. Investment since the
1982 recession has been strong. The four years ending in 1982 witnessed poor investment growth. Plagued by stagnation, inflation,
high interest rates, and unrealistic depreciation allowances, most
incentives for investment vanished. Coupled with the effects of recession and low profitability, investment fell over 22 percent in
real terms compared to the 1978 level. Fortunately, measures enacted in 1981 and taking effect in 1982, such as the Economic Recovery Tax Act, turned this disturbing trend around. Since then investment has accelerated. In 1983, real investment rebounded 12.7
percent, followed by an additional 30.6 percent in 1984. The 1987
figure represents a 53.7 percent increase from the 1982 low.

131
Chart 11.8

REAL GROSS PRIVATE DOMESTIC INVESTMENT

Billions of Constant (1982) Dollars
700
680
660-

620
600
580
560

540 520

500A
480j

440
19
1979
1980
SOURCE: Bureau of Economic Analysis

1981

1982

1983

1984

1985

1986

'I

For 1987, total investment in current dollars was $716 billion.
The figure for 1987 in 1982 dollars-$687.6 billion-stood $33.6 billion higher than 1986, a 5.1 percent increase.
Business formation and earnings

One of the remarkable features of the Reagan expansion is the
growth in the number of businesses. Based on IRS information, the
number of businesses-corporations, partnerships, and proprietorships-has grown from 13.9 million in 1981 to an estimated 16.8
million in 1985, a 21 percent increase. The Bureau of Economic
Analysis reports that new incorporations grew 700,000 in 1986, and
grew by a similar amount last year.
What has caused this explosion in business formation? No definitive answer exists, of course, but a number of factors certainly contributed to it. President Reagan has been an ardent supporter of
free enterprise. America's entrepreneurial spirit is inspired by his
leadership. Central to this success was the return to economic principles that encourage initiative and reward achievement. Tax and
regulatory reform played key roles in improving the business climate in the United States. In short, incentive has been revived in
our economic system.
Reflecting the continuing economic expansion, business earnings
were strong and growing in 1987. Corporate pretax profits for 1987
compared to a year earlier were about $44 billion or 19 percent
higher. Income from proprietorships has grown, too. The increase
for 1987 is estimated to be $38 billion, representing an impressive
13 percent increase over 1986.

132
Chirt 11.9

BUSINESS EARNINGS
Billions of Dollars
330310290270-

Corporate Profits

250 230
210

Income

190
170
1501978

1979

1980

1981

1982

1983

1984

1985

1986

1987

SOURCE: Bureau
ol Eoonomic Analysis

As illustrated by the chart, business earnings are affected by the
business cycle. The two recession years, 1980 and 1982, show declines in both corporate profits and proprietors' income. The
growth of corporate profits slowed slightly in 1985, due to capital
consumption allowances, or in layman's terms, depreciation. The
figures used for the chart include both inventory and depreciation
adjustments, as reported by the Bureau of Economic Analysis.
In our free market system, profit is important not only as a
signal for competitive opportunity, but also as a major source of
saving. Retained corporate earnings contribute to the pool of funds
available for investment. In 1987, $43.3 billion was undistributed.
Even with this sizeable amount retained, $93.8 billion was paid out
in dividends, the largest nominal amount (and perhaps real as well)
ever.
The stock market
The stock market is often perceived as the nerve center of the
capitalist economy. Shares traded are claims to the present value
of the expected income stream generated by underlying corporate
assets and the estimated market value of those assets. As changing
economic and political factors affect the outlook for the economy,
specific industries, and specific firms, stock prices react to the expected change in profits and alternative investment opportunities.
Because stock prices are affected by expected future profits, risk
and uncertainty are important. Investors' expectations about a
wide range of future events differ. Stock prices reflect the constantly changing evaluation of these events. Since the market looks to a
future that is inherently uncertain and unknowable, the movement
of stock prices has to involve an element of speculation. An intangible and subjective evaluation of future business income plays a

133
central role in setting stock prices. The problem is
speculation sometimes feeds on itself. Sooner or that short-term
later speculative
enthusiasm exceeds reasonable proportions and the
bubble bursts,
leading to sharp market corrections.
The bull market began in 1982. From a Dow Jones
Industrial Average annual level of 884 in that year, the market
climbed to a
level of 1924 by December of 1986. The rise in the
market
reflected
the economic expansion and gradual decline
of interest rates,
among other things. In 1987 the stock market roared
reaching a level of 2722 in August. In that month to new highs,
interest rates
rose as fears of inflation clouded the bond market.
Anxiety
about
the course and control of economic policy also may
have
contributed to unsettling the markets. The Dow
in September and
in the first half of October. On Octoberdeclined
19 the Dow dropped 508
points, a record movement for one day. Chart 11.10
displays Dow
Jones averages for 1978-87.
Chart 11.10

Dow-Jones Industrial Average

Yearly Average Levels, 1978 - 1987
Monthly Averages, January 1987 - January 1988
2500

aSoo1
1000_
78
SOURCE:

79

80

81

Dow Jones &Co

82

83

84

85

86

87 Jan. Feb. Mar. Apr. May JuneJuly Aug. Sept. OcL Nov. Dec.
Jan.
187
1988

The impact of the stock market plunge on the
economy is unclear. On the one hand, there was definitely a sizeable
reduction of
wealth relative to the August high. If people feel
not consume as much. This may lead to a drag on poorer, they may
the economy. On
the other hand, even after the crash, the Dow remains
at the level
reached in 1986, a level that was seen as positive
for
the
If the 1987 stock market run up was mostly speculation, economy.
and the
decline was a return to realism, "Black Monday" may
have little
major impact on the nonfinancial economy. Nobel Laureate
Milton
Friedman argues that concern about Black Monday
for this reason. Furthermore, he and others point outis overstated
gains in the bond market since October 1987 partially, that capital
or perhaps
wholly, offset the decline in wealth due to the stock
market plunge.

134
Productivity trends
A key determinant of U.S. economic competitiveness is productivity growth, output per hour. The post-World War II U.S. record
has been impressive. From the fourth quarter of 1948 to the fourth
quarter 1973, it averaged 2.8 percent. Between late 1973 through
third quarter 1981, however, annual productivity growth dropped
to 0.7 percent. Inflation, the maturation of the baby boom with
greater numbers of new, less well-trained entrants into the work
force, high interest rates that discouraged investment, higher
energy costs, and a proliferation of government regulations have
been identified as contributing to slower productivity growth over
this eight-year period.
These trends are reflected in the chart for the years 1979-82. The
result: rising wages and salaries, but without compensatory productivity gains. Since then there has been an encouraging upturn in
U.S. productivity growth-notably in manufacturing. Growth in
output per hour in manufacturing in 1987 is estimated to be 3.3
percent (average annual rate). This is a slight drop from the 3.8
percent average increase in manufacturing productivity that occurred between the third quarter of 1981 and 1986. Yet it is significantly higher than the 1.5 percent increase in this sector between
1973 and 1981; it also eclipses the 2.6 percent post-World War II
average. Likewise, in contrast with the rest of the world, unit labor
costs in the U.S. have been declining. Although the U.S. has lost its
commanding productivity lead against other countries, the absolute
level of U.S. productivity remains higher than our trade partners.
Average yearly productivity growth rates move in cyclical directions. Productivity decline typically occurs at the beginning of recessions, as output falls in response to drops in demand; alternatively, productivity growth is high during economic recoveries and
initial phases of economic expansion.
Chart 11.11

PRODUCTIVITY IN MANUFACTURING
Average Annual Percent Growth Rates
6 -

5
43
2

-1

.1

9178

1979

1980

SOURCE: Bureau of LaborStadsacs

1981

1982

1983

198

1985

198

1987

135

Employment
One of the important benefits of a long expansion is the steady
growth of employment. As the current expansion, already the longest peacetime upswing, continues to generate jobs, employment opportunity is provided to more and more Americans. To date, this
expansion has generated 15 million new jobs. Consequently, the civilian unemployment rate has dropped to 5.6 percent in March
1988, a level which has not been lower since 1974.
For the country as a whole, the most important measure of economic progress is not the stock market average on Wall Street, but
new jobs provided on Main Street. Over the course of this recovery,
the employment data have been consistently positive, even as
many other economic indicators signaled trouble. The consistent
strength of the employment data occasionally led some to question
their accuracy. But throughout the expansion, the labor data have
better reflected the course of the economy, and other indicators
have had to be revised upward many times. Americans know job
numbers are the bottom line. Manufacturing employment has not
declined but has increased by almost one million jobs during the
last four years.
Another measure of the economic progress achieved is the employment-population ratio. This important measure of the economy's ability to create jobs climbed to a level of 62.0 percent in
March 1988.
Over the last year employment growth has continued, providing
an additional three million jobs. During the first three months of
1988, the economy continued this strong growth, pushing civilian
employment over 114 million.
Chart 11.12

CIVILIAN EMPLOYMENT
Millions of Workers
115 -

110-

105-

100-

1978

1979

1980

1981

1982

1983

1984

198

1987

SOURCE: Bureau atLabor atasflUcs

Economic outlook
The typical focus of an economic outlook is the change in real
gross national product. GNP is the sum of four economic activities:

136
consumption, investment, government spending at all levels, and
net exports. Table I1.1 shows the annual changes in each of these
economic activities since the beginning of the expansion in 1983.
TABLE 1.1-CHANGES INREAL GNP AND ITS COMPONENTS, 1983-87
(1982)dollars]
ofconstant
[Inbillions
1987

Activity

1986

1985

1984

1983

95.3
103.3
103.3
97.9
47.2
......................................................................................
.
Consumption..
56.7
154.4
17.9 -22.3
33.6
Investment...........................................................................................
-46.2
-64.1
-24.2
-37.6
9.7
.......................................................................................
.
Netexports..

purchases.........................................1..
Government
Total..
.....................................
growth in realGNP
Percent

.

49.2
27.6
.............................
17.2

28.7

7.3

113.1
22.3
106.1
107.7
105.8
....................................................................................
3.6
6.4
3.0
2.9
2.9

Analysis.
ofEconomic
Bureau
Source:

Many observations can be drawn from the "anatomy of an expansion." First, only for 1985 can one say that economic growth
was "government-led" with the growth in government purchases
offsetting declines in investment and net exports. The contribution
of government to GNP growth in 1987 was the lowest since the beginning of the expansion in 1983. Second, in 1987 net exports
became a stimulant to economic growth. Third, investment during
this expansion has been highly erratic, ranging from an increase of
$154.4 billion in 1984 to a decline of $22.3 billion in 1985. Fourth,
the growth in real personal consumption expenditures has been
stable-until this past year. One needs also to note that $29.1 billion of the $33.6 billion increase in investment in 1987 was in the
form of "change in business inventories"-goods produced but not
yet sold. Clearly the best economic news in 1987 was the dramatic
turnaround in net exports.
In its most simplistic form, the job of the forecaster is to estimate
the change in these economic activities--and therefore GNP-for
the upcoming year. Given the continuing real reductions in defense
outlays, the growth in government purchases will be somewhat
lower than that experienced in 1987 or 1986, probably in the range
of $12 to $15 billion. We agree with the consensus Blue Chip Indicator forecast that net exports will continue to improve and show a
year-over-year growth of from $25 to $30 billion. We anticipate
moderate growth in investment as inventories are depleted, probably in the range of $6 to $8 billion.
The central question of course revolves around the magnitude of
change in consumption for 1988-an activity representing twothirds of GNP. Preliminary data from the Department of Commerce show that consumption expenditures declined by $24.1 billion (1982 dollars) during the fourth quarter of 1987. We believe
much of this decline is traceable to the psychological aftershocks of
the stock market crash and the tightening of the money supply and
credit by the Federal Reserve during the first nine months of 1987.
The lagged effect of tight money may result in lackluster consumption in the first quarter of this year. However, the composite index
of leading indicators for February showed a healthy 0.9 percent increase. This strongly suggests that the economy will reflect moder-

137
ately positive real growth during the first quarter of 1988-the
quarter most economists believe will be the weakest this year.
The Administration's forecast of a 2.9 percent year-over-year real
growth in GNP during 1988 is realistic and highly achievable.
Should the increase in consumer spending during 1988 rebound to
recent historical levels (about $100 billion), real growth in 1988
could easily exceed 3 percent. The final phase-in of the 1986 Tax
Reform Act tax rates cuts certainly could provide an impetus for
more consumer spending.
III. FISCAL TRENDS

The past three decades have witnessed considerable changes in
the theory and practice of public finance. Fiscal orthodoxy, which
stressed balanced budgets and frugality in government expenditure, was eclipsed by neo-Keynesian doctrine that instead suggested balancing the entire economy by international creation of Federal deficits and surpluses to smooth business cycles. By breaking
the taboo against spending, the effect of this theory was to provide
a rationale for politicians to accede to special interest demands for
additional spending. Federal spending accelerated, and deficits
have become the rule rather than the exception.
As this fiscal result became more serious, a new subdiscipline of
economics emerged, known as public choice. This body of thought
explains how the loss of the balanced budget rule undermined
fiscal discipline in Congress. The lack of effective budget constraints has generated an untenable budget situation, prompting
reform proposals designed by public choice theorists to restore
fiscal responsibility.
Another important change in public finance deals with the structure and effects of the individual income tax. In the late 1970s,
lower and middle income taxpayers found themselves paying
higher tax rates as inflation adjustments in wages and salaries
pushed them into higher tax brackets. Middle income taxpayers
then faced marginal tax rates previously reserved for the wealthy.
The steeply progressive tax structure, moreover, was largely an illusion as the rich channeled their wealth into tax sheltered investments, and otherwise avoided the high tax rates.
As a result, the Reagan Administration's call for the Roth-Kemp
tax legislation was well received by taxpayers. All personal rates
were cut 23 percent and the brackets indexed for inflation. The
success of the 1981 law laid the foundation for bipartisan approval
of further personal tax cuts in 1986. The result has been a revolution in tax policy, reducing personal tax rates to a fraction of their
previous level. This may well be the greatest economic policy accomplishment of the Reagan Administration. Not only is the tax
code dramatically restructured, but these changes have become the
foundation for the longest peacetime expansion in U.S. history.
Taxing and Spending
Budget deficits are a relatively new occurrence on the American
political scene. The traditional taboo against Federal spending in
excess of tax revenues made budget deficits exceedingly rare except
during war or depressions. As Nobel Laureate James Buchanan

138
has pointed out, only under the influence of Keynesian doctrine did
politicians begin to believe that deficit spending was excusable, and
that the national debt was not a problem because "we owe it to
ourselves." This view became dominant in the early 1960s with the
rise of the "new economics." Though intended only to facilitate
fiscal "fine tuning" and full employment, the unintended effect of
this doctrine on political decisionmaking was disastrous. With congressional spending no longer constrained by the level of tax revenues, new programs were initiated and old ones expanded during
the 1960s. Except for 1969, the Federal Government has run a deficit in every year since 1960, through recessions and expansions
alike.
As James Buchanan and Richard Wagner have written:
The pre-Keynesian or classical fiscal constitution was not
written in any formal set of rules. It was, nonetheless,
almost universally accepted. And its importance lay in its
influence in constraining the profligacy of all persons,
members of the public along with the politicians who acted
for them. Because expenditures were expected to be financed from taxation, there was less temptation for dominant political coalitions to implement direct income transfers. Once the expenditure-taxation nexus was broken,
however, the opportunities for such income transfers were
increased.
This public choice perspective explains budget trends over the
last two decades. Some of the policy implications are considered in
the following section, but it is useful at this point to review the
fiscal record. As will be seen, rapid growth in transfer payments
fueled a surge in Federal outlays. The result is that Federal spending and deficits have soared to record highs in this decade. Even
though 1987's deficit has declined to $150 billion-a 32 percent improvement from the previous year-it remains intolerably high.
Growth of Federalspending
Between 1960 and 1987, Federal outlays have risen from $92.2
billion to $1.005 trillion-a nominal increase of 990 percent and a
real increase, measured in constant 1982 dollars, of 152 percent.
This increase has outpaced the rate of growth in GNP, pushing the
Federal outlay share of GNP from 18 percent in 1960 to nearly 23
percent in 1987.
During the same period, Federal receipts also grew from $92.5
billion in 1960 to $854 billion in 1987. That represents a nominal
increase of 823 percent and a real increase of 114 percent. Receipts
as a percent of GNP rose from 18.3 percent to 19.4 percent over
this period. Clearly, revenues over this period expanded briskly
enough to cover about $760 billion of additional spending. Unfortunately, Federal outlays increased $912 billion over this period.
Table III.1 presents the growth in the Federal budget during this
period.
The public choice view also predicts a change in the composition
of the budget. This is indeed the case, as transfer outlays jumped
from $24 billion in 1960 to $469 billion in 1987. This amounts to an
astounding 1,854 percent increase in nominal dollars and a 440 per-

139

cent increase after adjustment for inflation. Defense spending, in
contrast, after adjustment for inflation, increased during this
period but 30 percent. As a result, the share of total outlays devoted to defense shrank from 52 percent in 1960 to a little over 28 percent in 1987.
TABLE 111.1.-GROWTH OF CONGRESSIONAL SPENDING-SELECTED YEARS, 1960-87
inbillions]
[Dollars
t Percent
Outlays Percent
GP
GNP Defor
rues Percent
GNP Reve

Year

$92.2
118.2
195.6
332.3
590.9
946.3

1960 .....................................
1965 .....................................
1970 .....................................
1975 .....................................
1980 .....................................
.....................................
1985
1986 .....................................
1987
.....................................

1,004.6

18.2 $92.5
17.6 116.8
19.8 192.8
21.8 279.1
22.1 517.1
24.0 734.1
23.8 769.1
990.2
22.8 854.1

0.1
0.2
0.3
3.5
2.8
5.4
5.3
3.4

18.3 $0.0
17.4 -1.4
19.5 -2.8
18.3 -53.2
19.4 -73.8
18.6-212.3
18.5-221.1
19.4-150.4

andBudget.
Source:
Office
of Management

According to the Congressional Budget Office, the long-term
budget outlook will improve somewhat after fiscal 1989. Though
the deficit is projected to increase from $157 billion in 1988 to $176
billion in 1989, it is expected to decline to a level of $134 billion by
1993. As CBO's forecast is based on very modest economic growth,
it cannot be regarded as unduly optimistic, but may well be somewhat pessimistic with regard to revenues, particularly in fiscal
1988.
Under current law, Federal revenues will increase an average of
$73 billion in each of the next five fiscal years (1989-1993). By 1993,
$365 billion will be added to the level of baseline revenues. If Federal spending growth can be held to just half of the increase in revenues over the period, the deficit would be eliminated by 1993. The
table below displays Federal budget trends through 1993.
TABLE 111.2.-RISING TRENDS OF FEDERAL REVENUE AND SPENDING-FISCAL YEARS 1987-93
ofdollars]
[In billions
1987

Revenues..................................................................................
Outlays.....................................................................................
Deficit......................................................................................

1988

$854
1,005

150

157

1989

1990

1991

1992

1993

$953 $1,1812 $1,262
$897 $1,036 $1,11
1,270
1,055
1,2031,129

176

167

158

1,332

151

1,396

134

Source:
CBO.

The magnitude of the revenue increase under current law is
more than sufficient to reduce the deficit. Consequently, Congress
should not increase taxes, but instead focus on capping the rate of
Federal spending growth. As a study released by Senator Roth has
demonstrated, tax increases tend not to reduce the deficit but
rather to stimulate additional spending. Tax increases would thus
not only hamper economic growth, but prove counterproductive in
reducing the deficit as well.

84-405 0 - 88 - 6

140

Budget issues in the 1980s
One of the most often repeated myths of this decade is that the
1981 Reagan tax cuts caused the large structural budget deficits.
According to this point of view, the 1981 tax cuts drained the
Treasury, creating a long-term fiscal crisis. This view is contradicted by the facts. Federal revenues since 1980 have trended upward,
and are now at a record level. In 1987 the Treasury collected more
revenue than ever before in U.S. history.
Between 1980 and 1987 personal income tax payments rose from
$244 billion to $392.6 billion, an increase of 61 percent. Overall,
total receipts jumped 65 percent over the 1980-87 period. To suggest that this increase in receipts caused budget deficits is absurd.
The problem is that Federal outlay growth outpaced the significant
revenue increase over this time. Table III.3 below displays personal
income tax revenues for fiscal years 1980-87.
TABLE 111.3.-INDIVIDUAL INCOME TAX RVENUES-FISCAL YEARS 1980-87
[in billions
ofdollars}Year
1980 ..............................................................
1981
..............................................................
1982
..............................................................
1983 ..............................................................
1984
...............................................................
1985........................................
1986
..............................................................
1987
..............................................................

Revenue
244.1
285.9
297.7
288.9
298.4
334.5
348.9
392.6

Change
from
previous
year
26.2
41.8
11.8
- 8.8
9.5
36.1
14.4
43.7

Source:
OMB.

As shown in Table III.1, total revenues climbed from $517 billion
in 1980 to $854 in 1987, a rise of $337 billion. Over the same years
Federal outlays jumped from $591 billion to $1005 billion, an increase of $414 billion. Federal revenues have gone up every year
except 1983, when they were depressed $17 billion by recession. Yet
even in that year they were $83 billion above their 1980 level.
Higher receipts cannot cause budget deficits. In the 1980-87
period, receipts rose 65 percent, while outlays increased 70 percent.
The inability of Congress to hold the amount of expenditure growth
to that of receipts has resulted in large deficits. Though tax payments might have gone up even faster without the 1981 tax billbecause of "bracket creep," not stimulated economic growth-taxpayers' tolerance of high tax burdens would not have continued indefinitely.
Federaldeficits and debt in perspective
Federal deficits distort economic decisionmaking and pose a longterm threat to the American standard of living. This is reason
enough to favor elimination of Federal deficits and capping of the
national debt. While a gravely serious problem, the current fiscal
position of the Untied States is not hopeless, and since 1986 actually has improved.
As a percent of GNP, the total U.S. deficit share (from all units
of government) is projected to decline from 2.4 percent in 1987 to

141
2.3 percent in 1989. The West German deficit, in contrast, is expected to expand from 1.7 percent of GNP in 1987 to 2.7 percent in
1989. The French deficit will go from 2.8 percent of GNP in 1987 to
2.5 percent in 1989.
Most discussion of the deficit focuses on that of the national or
central government. Table III.4 below shows the deficit share of
GNP for major nations. Whereas the Japanese overall deficit share
of GNP will remain at about 1 percent, the Japanese central government's GNP share will average about 3.5 percent through 1989.
The U.S. fiscal position, while unfortunate, is clearly not out of line
with that of other major nations.
TABLE 111.4.-CENTRAL GOVERNMENT FINANCIAL BALANCES
GNP/GDP]
ofnominal
[Deficit( - ) asapercentage

Country:
United
States.
3.Japan
Germany..........................................................
France.
United
Kingdom.
Italy.
Canada.
Total.

1982

1983

1984

1985

2
1986 1987

-4.6
5.2
-2.1
-2.7
-2.8

-4.5
-4.0
-1.3
- 3.3
-3.1

-5.5

- 5.2
-4.9
-1.6
- 3.2
-2.8
-11.0
- 6.2

- 4.9
-3.7
-0.9
-3.3
- 2.4
-12.3
- 6.7

-3.4
-3.5
-1.3
-2.4
-2.1
-11.1 -10.2
- 4.9 -4.2

-4.5

- 4.8 - 4.4 -4.5

-10.3

-10.8

-6.8

2
1988

19892

- 4.8
-3.6
- 1.0
- 2.8
-2.3

- 3.3 -3.1
-3.5
-3.5
-1.7
- 2.2
-1.9
-1.8
-9.7
-9.9
- 3.3 -3.8

- 4.2 - 3.4

- 3.3

and
methods,
onnational
where
thedataarebased
Kingdom
andtheUnited
States
fortheUnited
basis
except
Account
National
OnaStandard
basis.
where
theyareonanadministrative
in France
OECD
estimates
andprojections.
beginninR
April1oftheyearshown.
Forthefiscalyear
andexchange
rates.
weights
1982GNP/GDP
andDevelopment.
Cooperation
Organization
forEconomic
Source:

Similarly, while the Federal debt is excessive, as a percent of national output it has been far larger in the past. Relative to other
nations, the 1986 debt share of GNP was 56 percent for the United
States, compared to 91 percent for Japan and 58 percent for the
United Kingdom. Often the issue of government debt is linked with
concerns about other types of debt. Table III.5 shows the GNP
shares of various kinds of debt. The U.S. situation, while serious, is
still not extreme by international standards.
TABLE 111.5.-DOMESTIC NONFINANCIAL SECTORS' GROSS DEBT/GNP RATIOS
[In percent]
andyear
Country

United
States:
1975 .42
1985 .52
1986 .56
Japan:
1975 .39
1985 .90
1986 .91
Germany:
1975 .25
1985 .41
1986 .41

Public

Personal
Coirporate
sector
sector

Total

37
42
45

50
61
65

129
155
166

94
102
102

33
46
47

176
238
240

63
72
71

42
56
55

130
149
167

142
TABLE 111.5.-DOMESTIC NONFINANCIAL SECTORS' GROSS DEBT/GNP RATIOS-Continued
[In percent]
Country
andyear
UnitedKingdom:
1975 .......................................
1985 .......................................
1986
' .......................................
Canada:
1975 .......................................
1985 .......................................
1986 .......................................

Public

Corporate
Personal
sector
sector

Total

63
60
58

46
46
48

33
51
55

142
157
161

53
83
84

65
64
64

52
50
54

170
197
202

Third
quarter.
Note.-Nation balance-sheet
data.ForCanada,
public
sector
consolidated
debtfigures
areestimated.
Source:
Bank
forInternational
Settlements.

Continuing the improvement of the U.S. fiscal situation will require serious congressional efforts to cap spending growth. Though
the fiscal position of the United States is not enviable, it is fair to
notice that many foreign critics of U.S. policy often reside in nations with similar if not more serious problems. Moreover, critics in
such nations usually enjoy the benefit of U.S. defense spending,
which their own governments are unwilling to provide. Instead, the
bulk of their government spending is dominated by transfer payments, social programs, and subsidies.
Public choice and the propensity of legislatures to overspend
Public choice theory uses economic concepts to analyze democratic decisionmaking in legislative bodies. Its prominence was recognized by the award of the Nobel Prize in economics to James Buchanan in 1986. The public choice approach emphasizes a scrutiny
of the institutional rules and practices that govern how legislative
committees and full legislatures make policy. At present, rules regarding the Federal budget are clearly not a powerful constraint
against excessive congressional spending.
In the consideration of a specific item of government spending,
only its benefits are usually fully considered. These benefits are
normally visible and concentrated among distinct special interest
constituencies, whereas their costs are diffused among all taxpayers, and considered only later if at all. A $10 million program costs
each taxpayer but 10 cents. Thus, the task of special interest advocates is to directly or indirectly link the votes in favor of such special interest programs together to form a coalition package large
enough to ensure majority support. In this way programs are
funded that probably could not prevail if considered alone on their
own merits. At the margin, the result is that resources drawn out
of the economy to finance additional government spending contribute fewer benefits to society than the costs they impose.
Following the precedent of the British parliamentary system,
which granted the power of the purse to the legislature to prevent
overtaxing by the Crown, the framers of the U.S. Constitution gave
this power to Congress. Not a dime can be spent by the Federal
Government without appropriation by Congress. The only independent power given the President is the veto, and this requires

143
complete rejection of entire appropriation bills, the necessary with
the unnecessary measures. By packaging separate appropriations
bills into one huge measure, Congress can lessen the veto power.
Recently, support is growing for a court test of Article I, Section 7,
of the Constitution, which may empower the President to veto any
item of omnibus legislation that was subject to a separate vote
during the legislative process. We strongly urge President
Reagan to see if a line-item veto of this nature would be held
constitutional.
Powerful Members of Congress can satisfy their constituencies
not only by routinely planting uneconomic subsidies in spending
measures, but by burying even the most outlandish expenditures
within these measures as well, often in secret. This practice merely
encourages logrolling and makes spending restraint more difficult.
Regardless of their vote on the recent fiscal 1988 continuing resolution, almost three months after the start of the fiscal year most
Members of Congress would not have supported many of the individual items included in the 1,194 page Continuing Resolution if
considered individually. For example, items such as a $25 million
appropriation for a private industrial airport, $8 million for religious schools in France (the retraction of which has been requested
by its sponsor and approved by Congress), a $10 million tax subsidy
for railroad workers, $9.5 million for an "Intermodal Urban Demonstration Project," $60,000 for a Belgian endive research center in
Massachusetts, and other expenditures on cranberries, crawfish,
and the list goes on, probably would not pass Congress on an individual up or down vote.
The need for institutionalreform
Obviously, the so-called budget process offers little budgeting and
less process. Existing rules under which budget decisions are made
do nothing to contain congressional spending habits. While institutional reform does not offer a magical solution to lack of fiscal discipline, it does at least offer the prospect of more discipline in Federal spending.
For these reasons Congress should enact the balanced budget/tax
limitation constitutional amendment, and line-item veto. Opponents argue these measures would either be ineffective and thus
meaningless, or would actually work and thereby undermine the
economy. Despite the fact these two arguments contradict one another, both reforms are heatedly opposed by virtually all special interest groups. This united opposition by spending advocates would
seem to indicate that constitutional reforms could indeed work and
would restrain increased spending. It is obvious to all that the current budget system is not working, and that this situation serves
those who lobby for additional Federal funds and against measures
offering the potential of curbing the growth of Federal spending.
Distributionof income tax burden
Ever since the Roth-Kemp tax bill was first advanced, opponents
have alleged it would lead to a "giveaway to the rich." Supporters
of Roth-Kemp pointed out that in many respects the apparent progressivity of the tax code was as illusion, and that a reduction of
unrealistically high tax rates, while important mainly for other

144

reasons, would also reduce incentives to shelter income and otherwise avoid taxation. As a result income earning potential then outside the taxable economy could be drawn into taxable activities.
This could well lead to the rich assuming a larger share of the tax
burden, according to this view. This result is shown in Tables III.6
and III.7.
After the enactment of the 1981 tax legislation, the critics of
Roth-Kemp periodically renewed their attacks, principally on the
basis of the bill's alleged regressivity. These attacks have been
based on the ideological desire for a steeply progressive tax rate
structure in law, and generally without the benefit of facts as provided in actual income tax data. It is ironic that IRS tax collection
data have played such a small role in discussion of this issue.
There are different views of the function of the tax system and
the role of progressivity. According to one side of the argument,
the tax code, in raising revenue, should additionally be used to
alter the after-tax distribution of income. In other words, the tax
code should be an instrument of social policy to redistribute income
in a way deemed desirable by politicians and bureaucrats in Washington. Another view sees the tax system principally as a device to
raise revenue to finance needed public goods with a minimum of
interference with the private sector.
Attempts to manipulate income shares using the tool of tax
policy mainly serves to drive the rich into tax shelters. As a result,
middle and lower income taxpayers are forced to assume more of
the tax burden. In other words, while some may feel good about
"soaking the rich" with a high statutory tax rate, this rate will not
in reality be paid; thus more of the revenue burden will consequently fall on others. By reducing excessively high tax rates,
which are merely totems of equalitarian ideology, the tax burden
will be shifted in a way that is progressive. A results-oriented,
pragmatic look at the facts makes the merit of this view compelling.
TABLE 111.6.-TAX PAYMENTS BY PERCENTILE, 1981-86
[In billions
ofconstant
(1986)dollars]
Year

1981
.................................
1982 .................................
1983 .
1984 ..
,
1985 .................................
1986 '.................................
1981-86 percent
change..

....

Wealthy
topI Upper
income
top Middle
income Lowerttiom
e
percentile 5 percentile 50-95percentile percentile
61.4
118.9
60.8
113.0
59.5
111.2
66.1
121.2
71.9
131.0
96.7
164.3
57.5
+38.2
.......................................................

196.2
177.5
166.2
169.4
173.4
182.7
-6.9

25.4
23.1
21.5
23.1
23.5
23.9
-5.9.9

' Preliminary.
Source:
Internal
Revenue
Service.

The upward shift in the tax burden
Table III.6 shows that the top one percent of taxpayers-here denoted as the wealthy, with 1986 adjusted gross incomes (AGI) over
$120,262-saw their tax payments jump from $61.4 billion in 1981.

145

to $96.7 billion in 1986, measured in constant 1986 dollars to eliminate distortion from inflation. This amounts to an increase of 57
percent. If a more inclusive measure of upper income is preferred
by selecting the top five percent of taxpayers (the affluent, with
AGI over $62,480), tax payments rose from $118.9 billion in 1981 to
$164.3 billion in 1986, an increase of 38 percent.
What of the middle and lower income groups? Those taxpayers
earning between roughly $17,300 and $62,400 of 1986 income (the
middle class, comprised of the 51 to 95 percentile) paid $196.2 billion in 1981 but only $182.7 billion in 1986, a decline of 7 percent.
The lowest 50 percent of tax filers saw their tax payments decline
by 6 percent over the same period. This decline in tax payments,
reflected in lower tax rates and tax burden for this group, accompanied a 10.5 percent increase in real AGI. Tax payments for all
income groups rose between 1983 and 1986, due to rising incomes
and economic growth. However, the burden of taxation shifted to
upper incomes during this period.
Another way to demonstrate increased progressivity is to examine the change in the percent of the total tax burden paid by each
group over time. Between 1981 and 1986 the share of the tax
burden shouldered by the wealthy increased from 18 percent to 26
percent. The share of the tax burden paid by the affluent rose from
35 percent to 44 percent, while that of the middle class declined
from 58 percent to 49 percent. The tax burden paid by lower
income Americans dropped from 7.5 percent to 6.4 percent over the
same period. Table III.7 presents annual data on tax burden shares
between 1981 and 1986.
TABLE 111.7.-SHARE OF TAX BURDEN BY PERCENTILE, 1981-86
[Percent
oftotal]
Year

Wealthy
top1
Upper
income Middle
income Lboettrom
e
percentile top5 percentile50-95 percentile percertile

81 .18.1
1982 .19.4
1983 .19.9
.21.
1984.....................................................................2.
1985 .21.9
1986 .26.1

change.............................................................
1981-86 percent

+44.2

34.9
36.0
37.2
.....................
39.9
44.3

+ 26.9

57.6
56.6
55.6
53.0
38.6
52.9
49.3

-14.4

7.5
7.3
7.2
.
7.2
6.4

- 14.9

Source:
IRS.

The 1981 tax bill cut tax rates 23 percent across the board, and
indexed tax brackets starting in 1985. How were the effective tax
rates paid by each percentile grouping affected over this period?
Table III.8 below displays the effective average tax rates over this
time.
Finally, how did the change in average tax rates vary among the
groups? The decline in average tax rates was greater for the
middle class and lower class than for the upper income groups. The
average tax rate falls for the highest income group despite much
higher tax payments because the lower marginal tax rates increased incentives to realize more taxable income-by reducing the

146
tax penalties for additional entrepreneurial and work effort as well
as for capital gains.
The IRS data demonstrate that upper income groups are now
paying more taxes, and have assumed a much larger share of the
income tax burden. The impact of the 1981 tax bill on the income
tax system has clearly been progressive.
TABLE 111.8.-AVERAGE EFFECTIVE TAX RATES BY PERCENTILE
Year

1981
........................................
1982
........................................
1983
........................................
1984
........................................
1985
........................................
1986
........................................
1981-86 percentchange.............................................................

Wealthy
topI
Upper
income Middle
income Lower
income
percentile top5 percentile50-95percentile percentile
34.2
32.1
29.8
29.8
29.7
3
.9.1

1

26.5
25.0
23.5
23.7
24.1
26.i
.1
-1.5

14.8
13.7
12.6
12.3
12.1
12.1
-18.2

6.6
6.1
5.7
5.8
5.7
5.6
-15.1

Source:
IRS.

IV. ECONOMIC GROWTH AND THE RISING STANDARD OF LIVING

Growth without inflation has been the goal of Reagan Administration economic policy from the start. Growth is not an end in
itself, but is necessary to provide more opportunity and a higher
standard of living for all Americans. The Administration wisely focused on enlarging the size of the economic pie rather than becoming enmeshed in the distributional politics of dividing the spoils of
a shrinking or "zero-sum" society.
Unfortunately, for years stagflation caused many policymakers
to resign to that defeatist view. The shrinking economy was evident in a decrease in real family incomes. In 1980 alone, real
median family income fell $1,614-the largest drop on record.
Reagan Administration policy was designed to reverse this foreboding trend and to restore economic growth by reducing the fiscal
and regulatory barriers to work, save, and invest. Once in place,
this strategy worked remarkably well.
The current expansion, the longest peacetime upswing in U.S.
history, has created 15 million new jobs while the unemployment
rate has fallen to its lowest level since 1979. The employment-population ratio, an important measure of the economy s ability to
create enough jobs, has climbed to 62.1 percent, a record level. Real
median family income has rebounded from the stagflation era
trend, jumping 10.7 percent since 1982. The following discussion
outlines the favorable income and distribution trends of the
Reagan years.
Real median family income
Over the years a number of political and news media reports
have contended that real median family income has trended downward under the Reagan Administration. Most of these reports do
not present a full disclosure of time-series data, so it is impossible
to know what changes in income are being described. For example,
if income data from one year in the late 1970s are compared with

147
one year from the early 1980s, it is possible to allege that a massive
decline in family income was caused by some misanthropic Reagan
Administration policy. This "selective" method is as inaccurate as
it is misleading.
Faced with facts, critics either have been silenced or forced to
invent new arguments to support their contention that income
growth has suffered. Such efforts are contradicted by five consecutive years of family income gains, amounting to a 10.7 percent increase over the course of the expansion. The combination of strong
economic growth and low inflation has restored solid income
growth. Figures for 1987 not yet available should show continued
sizeable improvements.
TABLE V.1.-TURNAROUND OF FAMILY INCOMES 1979-86
[In constant
(1986)dollars]
Year

Real
median
29,588
27,974
26,991
26,618
27,155
27,903
28,269
29,458

1979..............................................................
1980 ..............................................................
1981
..............................................................
1982...............................................................
1983..............................................................
1984..............................................................
1985..............................................................
1986...............................................................

Annual
change
-59
- 1,614
-983
-373
537
748
366
1,189

Source:
Census
Bureau.

Are the rich getting richerand the poor poorer?
Some critics of this expansion seek to use income distribution
data to suggest the rich are getting richer and the poor poorer
under President Reagan. The table below demonstrates this argument is not valid. Measured in constant 1986 dollars, the percentage of families earning under $20,000 annually declined from 33.4
percent in 1980 to 31.8 percent in 1986. All the articles written
about "the decline of the middle class" may have a kernel of truth,
as the proportion of families earning between $20,000 and $50,000
did fall from 50.6 percent to 47.5 percent over the same period. The
reason is not "downward mobility," but quite the opposite. The percentage of American families earning over $50,000 annually has
risen sharply since 1980. This group has expanded dramatically
from 15.9 percent of all families in 1980 to 20.7 percent in 1986.
TABLE IV.2.-DISTRIBUTION OF FAMILIES BY INCOME-SELECTED YEARS 1970-86
[Percent
oftotal]
Year
1970 ...................................................
1975 ...................................................
1980 ...................................................
1981
...................................................
1982
...................................................
1983
...................................................
1984 .................................

income High
income
Lowincome
soer
$50,000
under
$20,000 Medium
$50,000

31.8
32.6
33.4
35.0
35.6
35.3
34.1

54.3
52.7
50.6
49.5
48.7
48.2
48.0

13.9
14.8
15.9
15.4
15.5
16.4
18.0

148
TABLE IV.2.-DISTRIBUTION OF FAMILIES BY INCOME-SELECTED YEARS 1970-86-Continued
[Percent
oftotal]
Year

Lowincome
under
$20,000

2dium00come
Highincome
$0,000over
$50,000

1985 .............................................

33.4

47.6

18.9

1986 .............................................

31.8

47.5

20.7

Note.-Columns
denote
constant
(1986)dollars.
Rows
maynotaddto 100because
ofrounding.
Source:
Census
Bureau.

Upward mobility has been shared by black families. As the following table shows, the share of blacks earning over $50,000
jumped from 6.0 percent in 1980 to 8.8 percent in 1986. In contrast,
the share of blacks earning under $20,000 fell from 57.5 percent in
1980 to 54.7 percent in 1986.
TABLE IV.3.-DISTRIBUTION OF BLACK FAMILIES BY REAL INCOME-SELECTED YEARS 1970-86
[Percent
oftotal]
Year

1970 .............................................
1975 .............................................
1980 .............................................
1981 .............................................
1982 .............................................
1983 .............................................
1984 .............................................
1985 .............................................
1986 .............................................

Lowincome
income over
High
income
under
$20,000 Middle
$2
$50,000
50,000
56.7
57.5
59.2
60.1
59.2
59.2
57.5
54.7

38.6
55.2
36.4
35.7
35.4
34.4
33.7
34.9
36.7

4.7
39.4 5.3
6.0
5.1
4.5
6.2
7.0
7.5
8.8

Note.-Columns
denote
constant
(1986)dollars.
Rows
maynotaddto 100because
ofrounding.
Source:
Census
Bureau.

The bottom line is that the average American is better off now
than during the stagnation of the Carter years. The best measure
of income in the opinion of most analysts, real per capita personal
income, showed a 12 percent gain since 1980. Some partisans are
mystified because middle class Americans are so complacent about
the supposedly shocking deterioration in their standard of living.
The data suggest why this is so: Most people know their standard
of living has increased, not declined. The alleged decline of income
and living standards is a myth that is not even supported by everyday experience.
Real per capita disposablepersonal income (RPCDPI)
As independent measures of income, the comparison of real per
capita disposable personal income (RPCDPI) and family income is
an interesting exercise. Measures of per capita income are less affected by changes in family structure and social arrangements
than are those of real median family income. Real median family
income gains would tend to be lower over the last decade as the
higher divorce rate and the trend towards more female headed
households reflect the absence of one potentially employed parent.
RPCDPI also is an after-tax per capita measure. The point is that

149

these two measures are quite different, lessening the probability
that any distorting factors would be shared and significantly affect
the results. Of course, as a median measure, the family income statistic also differs from RPCDPI, which is an arithmetic mean.
RPCDPI has risen by 13 percent relative to its level in both 1980
and 1982. While declining by one percent in 1980, this measure of
income shows a less serious problem than does real median family
income in that year. This is partially due to the inflation adjustment, and perhaps also to the social changes alluded to above. In
addition, the next table shows how these income gains have been
reflected in increased real consumption-another measure of
higher living standards.
TABLE IV.4.-REAL PER CAPITA DISPOSABLE INCOME AND CONSUMPTION, 1979-87
(1982)dollars]
(Inconstant
Income

Personal
consumption
expenditures

Year:
1979 ..................................................
1980 ..................................................
1981 ..................................................
1982 ..................................................
1983 ..................................................
1984 ..................................................
1985 ..................................................
1986 ..................................................
1987 ..................................................

$9,829
9,722
9,769
9,724
9,930
10,419
10,622
10,947

$8,904
8,783
8,794
8,818
9,139
9,489
9,830
10,142
10,97610,234

Source:
Census
Bureau.

The bad jobs myth
Critics of the Administration have been stymied by reports of
robust employment growth, falling unemployment rate, and higher
standard of living. With standard data from the Bureau of Labor
Statistics and Department of Commerce dominated by upward
trends, there has been an increasing tendency to resort to questionable manipulation of existing data by those critics. For example,
analyses purporting to show that nine million manufacturing job
have been lost since 1979, that wealth concentration has dramatically increased, or that all or most of the new jobs being created
paid under $7,000 a year are inaccurate and misleading.
Most of the new jobs created during this expansion have been in
occupations that pay relatively well. These include finance and
business services; managerial and professional; precision production; craft and repair; and technical. Despite the wide circulation of
the thesis that most of the jobs created during this expansion pay
under $7,000 annually, it is completely false. Actually, only 8 percent of the jobs generated by this expansion pay under $7,000 annually, and only 4 percent of the total full-time workforce earn less
than this amount today. Table IV.5 shows that the trend since 1982
is in the opposite direction than that asserted by the "bad jobs"
thesis.

150
TABLE IV.5.-DISTRIBUTION OF EMPLOYMENT BY EARNINGS, 1973-85
[Percent
oftotal]
l
Low

Middle
-

High3

Year:
1973 ............................................
1974 ............................................
1975 ............................................
1976 ............................................
1977 ............................................
.
1978 .
1979 ............................................
1980 ............................................
1981 ..
1982 .
1983 ............................................
1984 ............................................
1985 ............................................

..

.

31.8
32.0
32.2
31.7
32.2
31.2
......
30.6
31.9
33.0
33.0
32.1
32.4
31.4

51.6
52.6
52.6
52.8
51.6
52.0
53.0
54.1
53.0
54.0
53.3
52.6
52.6

16.1
15.4
15.1
15.5
16.2
16.9
16.3
14.0
14.0
13.0
14.6
14.9
15.9

Below
one-half
median
income.
One-half
totwicemedian
income.
Above
twicemedian
income.
Source:
Bureau
ofLabor
Statistics
Data.

Economic policy must be judged by its results. This expansion
has created 15 million new jobs and reversed the decline in real
family income that began under the Carter Administration. With
the basis for economic growth restored, 1988 should see continued
job creation and further increases in all measures of income.
V. EXPORTS-THE NEXT GROWTH SECTOR

This year will usher in significant shifts in the pattern of U.S.
export/import flows. The key reason behind this large turnaround
is the cheaper dollar, which has reduced the foreign price of most
American exports while making imports that much more expensive. According to the International Monetary Fund (IMF), U.S.
export volumes are expected to grow by an impressive 14.6 percent
this year, while import volume growth will be a modest 1.2 percent.
These changes have been evident since early 1986. Between then
and the end of 1987, America's export volume jumped by 18.6 percent while import volume rose by 11.5 percent. In constant 1982
dollars, U.S. exports of merchandise goods moved from $214 billion
in 1982 to $245 billion in 1986. Using the same methodology, recent
Commerce Department estimates put 1987's merchandise exports
at $290 billion. As a result, there is a strong possibility that 1988
will witness a $40 billion improvement in the "real" trade balance,
which measures volume by factoring out inflation.
Particularly encouraging is the broadly based nature of America's export offensive, running the gamut from agricultural to hightechnology goods. The Department of Agriculture estimates that
exports of fiber, livestock, food, and vegetables in the fiscal year
ending last September will total 141 million metric tons worth $32
billion, versus 129 million metric tons worth $27.9 billion in 1986.
The result: America's year-over-year, 1986-87, agricultural trade
surplus of $11.5 billion will more than double the previous year's.
Meanwhile, a rising backlog of capital goods orders ensures healthy
export growth in this sector. Reflecting their price sensitivity, real

151
exports of consumer goods are also projected to show double-digit
increases over the next several years. One of the best pieces of
recent U.S. trade news involves the chemical sector, which has significantly recovered its competitive position after encountering a
difficult period in the early 1980s. The industry registered an impressive turnaround in 1986 when its exports reached $22.8 billion,
while imports were $15 billion, for a trade surplus of $7.8 billion.
The Chemical Manufacturers Association estimates that the 1987
chemical trade surplus will reach $10.3 billion.
Likewise, import growth, on a volume basis, is also beginning to
slow. For manufactured goods-which make up approximately twothirds of total U.S. trade volume-imports have trended downward
through September 1987, increasing by 8 percent, versus a comparable rise of 14.2 percent during the first three quarters of 1986.
Merchandise import volumes as a whole are also slowing-rising by
2.9 percent from third quarter 1986 to third quarter 1987, versus
an 18.4 percent increase in the preceding four quarters.
Given the magnitude of the present U.S. merchandise trade imbalance, these volume shifts are only just beginning to be reflected
in dollar terms. The consensus of both public and private sector analysts is that a return of the United States to near-balance in its
overall current account (which measures trade in both goods and
services) will not occur until the early-to-middle 1990s. But over the
next year or so, those shifts in trade-flow volume will begin to play
a major role in helping bring about major reductions in the imbalance in current dollars, as price adjustments to the lower dollar
are completed.
Regarding trade and growth, U.S. trade strategy should accordingly be directed toward the long haul. Dominant emphasis should
be placed on ensuring the continued growth of American exports
through an expanding global economy. To achieve this goal, the
United States must continue to push for open world markets and
global expansion. Before tackling these subjects, a few words on
present discrepancies in estimating U.S. trade flows are in order.
Data gaps
For understandable reasons, U.S. trade policy has been dominated by concern over the merchandise account. Monthly trade figures
have taken on considerable importance. So too have the increasingly sober conclusions derived from them. As the United States
begins to adjust its external accounts, however, there is an equally
compelling need to place those figures in appropriate perspectivefor two reasons.
First, the figures themselves may overstate the magnitude of the
present external U.S. imbalance, through at least "random" undercounting of American exports. A case in point is supplied by
Canada, where the Commerce Department finally acknowledged in
mid-1987 that U.S. merchandise exports had been substantially understated over the previous several years because truckers had not
filed appropriate export documents. Because most of the bilateral
trade between these two countries is carried in trucks, this oversight matters. For 1986 alone, the correction involved a $10.7 billion upward adjustment in U.S. export sales to Canada.

152
Is the Canadian case but an isolated example, without any longterm significance for deriving truly accurate estimates of U.S.
trade flows? Mack Ott, senior economist at the Federal Reserve
Bank of St. Louis, does not think so. After examining IMF data on
U.S. exports to the other Group of Seven (G-7) countries-namely
Canada, France, West Germany, Italy, Japan, and the United Kingdom-Ott concluded that U.S. exports to these markets, which account for about two-thirds of our reported merchandise trade deficit, have also been understated throughout the 1980s. "The correction," he says, "of U.S./G-7 exports has averaged nearly $12.5 billion a year since 1981, or about 12.9 percent of U.S./G-7 exports.
The resulting overstatement of the U.S./G-7 trade deficit has been
substantially higher: 27.6 percent during 1981-86 and 13.6 percent
during the current year [1987]."
The second reason involves possible distortions regarding calculations of U.S. trade in services and intangible goods, which make up
an increasingly significant component of the U.S. balance of payments. At the very least, a number of organizations, including the
IMF and the Office of U.S. Trade Representative believe that the
internationalization of services, as well as the growth of service industries throughout the world, requires considerably more precise
data than are presently available. Unlike merchandise goods, most
services (consider banking and insurance) are "invisible" and intangible and are not accordingly accompanied by customs documents when crossing international borders. As a result, companies
typically fail to maintain records on the value of services embodied
in goods and the revenues derived from them.
As the world's leading service economy, there is a strong possibility that notwithstanding discovery of additional service imports
flowing into the United States, more reliable data on invisibles will
more likely show the United States is seriously understating the
size of its own services exports, and thus exaggerating its balance
of payments deficit. The United States has succeeded in getting
service trade included in the new round sponsored by the General
Agreement on Tariffs and Trade (GATT). A key item for the
Geneva negotiations is progress on developing a more accurate
system for measuring service trade flows.
Although the persistence and magnitude of America's external
balance is a cause for concern, the strenght of the real domestic
economy hardly justifies a crash effort to reduce imports by applying drastic measures to reduce domestic consumption. The result
would surely be a recession in the world's keytone economy. The
preferred course of action is to allow market forces to bring about
adjustments in the overall consumption-savings balance between
the United States, on the one side, and its surplus European and
Asian partners, on the other. Because these trading surpluses have
been generated over a number of years, they will not disappear tomorrow. Now that U.S. firms are beginning to reap significant foreign market advantages as a result of a cheaper dollar, this would
be the worst possible moment to lose patience with the adjustment
process. In 1988 expanded exports will contribute one percent to
America's GNP growth. This consideration alone should make
export promotion the key trade policy goal of the United States for
the foreseeable future.

153
Open markets
Dollar devaluation is not enough. The United States also needs
the assistance of its trade partners if it is to succeed in expanding
exports. Their failure to exercise appropriate responsibility in helping the United States facilitate this shift could inadvertently harm
them. U.S. Trade Representative Clayton Yeutter, on a recent trip
to Australia, put the matter succinctly:
What our trading partners must understand is that protectionist pressures in America did not develop in a vaccum.
Other nations have contributed to these pressures by refusing to open their markets, by failing to make timely
and appropriate changes in economic policy, and by continuing or even increasing export subsidies and other
trade-distorting practices. We have a $170 billion trade deficit [for 1987], and as long as there are major trading partners who seem indifferent to this situation, there will be
protectionist sentiment in the United States. We have our
own responsibility in this area too, of course, but not all
the global responsibility lies in Washington, D.C.
The most important contribution to be made by our allies in
their willingness to absorb an increasing share of global exports,
particulary those from the United States. In substantial measure,
this is already occurring. Consider U.S.-European Community
trade. Dollar depreciation began to translate into a significant
jump in EC imports of U.S. goods in late 1986 and has continued
apace. As a result, 1987 U.S. exports to the European Community
were up 14 percent, to $60.6 billion from $53.2 billion for 1986.
Based on a comparison of export-import data for the whole year,
the bilateral U.S. trade imbalance with the European Community
declined 6 percent. Comparable actions on the part of South Korea,
Taiwan, and Japan are no less necessary-and they have been slow
in coming.
Meanwhile, U.S. efforts to pry open closed foreign markets must
continue because onerous, if subtle, foreign market barriers frequently discriminate against U.S. exports. Those barriers must be
dismantled because they distort the operation of free markets, and
in so doing prevent nations from undertaking long-overdue domestic reforms, encouraging reliance on exports for growth, not internally generated demand.
As the world's largest and most open market, the United States
has played a crucial role in promoting these foreign growth strategies. As Republican Members pointed out in last year's Joint Economic Report: "Over the past five years, most of our partners have
relied on export sales to the United States for between one-quarter
and one-half of their domestic growth. The result was that between
1981 and 1986, U.S merchandise imports jumped from $273 billon
to $387 billion." American demand for imports up through the mid1980s helped pull the global economy out of recession-and was accordingly necessary. But the United States can no longer be expected to shoulder the major burden for ensuring future global recovery. That task must now fall on other shoulders.

154
Faced with huge trade imbalances and increasing protectionist
pressures at home, the Administration has come forward with a
balanced and assertive market opening package designed to accelerate on the bilateral (country-by-country, product-by-product) and
other negotiating fronts.
Bilateral actions
Over the past two years, the most widely reported actions initiated by the United States have been taken under Section 301 of the
1974 Trade Act, which calls upon the United States to challenge
unfair practices in foreign countries. Since September 1985, the
Reagan Administration has put the Section 301 mechanism to effectrive use by tackling foreign government obstacles to U.S. exports on 17 occasions alone, of which 13 have resulted in an end to
these practices. In 1987, Section 301 actions included imposition of
$300 million in duties on Japanese exports of electronic goods for
alleged violation of a bilateral agreement providing U.S. semiconductor makers access to Japan's market. A host of similar steps
were directed at the European Community, South Korea, and
Taiwan for their alleged failure to provide equitable access to
American imports.
Of at least equal significance, but less publicized importance,
have been longer term U.S. initiatives to halt the spread of injurious dumping and subsidy violations. The record speaks for itself.
According to the International Trade Commission (ITC), between
1982 and 1987, the United States completed no less than 321 countervailing duty (subsidy) and 562 antidumping (price-discrimination) cases.
Trade negotiations
Broader U.S. efforts to strengthen and expand free trade rules on
the regional and global levels also constitute an important focus of
American trade policy for two signficant reasons. First, it will
enable the United States to obtain the brodest possible international consensus on what constitutes "free and fair trade" in a rapidly
changing global marketplace. A key consideration in this regard is
the principal of "non-discrimination," which in extending equal
trade rights and obligations to all countries simultaneously
strengthens the bonds of cooperation in support of open markets
and equitable rules.
Second, strengthening and expanding free trade rules also has its
flip side: that is, by working with its partners to establish up-dated
definitions and appropriate enforcement machinery for handling
unfair trade practices, the United States runs less risk of retaliation. The U.S.-Canada and Multilateral GATT negotiations are crucial in this regard.
U.S.-Canada free trade area
In December 1987, the United States and Canada agreed to enter
into a free trade agreement. If implemented, the agreement provides for elimination of tariffs and a number of non-tariff barriers
involving more than $130 billion worth of trade between the
United States and Canada within 10 years, starting January 1,
1989.

155
GATT negotiations
Launched in the fall of 1986 in Punta del Este, Uruguay, the
eighth multilateral trade round reconvened in early 1988 under the
auspices of GATT. With world trade expected to grow by a healthy
4.5 percent this year, the time is ripe for significant breakthroughs
in the GATT negotiations. In light of the organization's diverse
membership-unlike the first seven rounds, this one prominently
involves Third World economies-progress was slow in coming in
1987. But it came nevertheless. Here are some highlights:
Strengthening GA TT.-In previous eras, dispute settlement procedures in the organization may have served the interests of
GATT's members. With the entrance of large numbers of developing countries and the emergence of new problem areas (foreign investment and heavily subsidized agricultural trade, for just two)
the Geneva bureaucracy, where GATT is headquartered, is confronted with the challenge of revising its dispute settlement procedures. In response to domestic U.S. concerns regarding cases of alleged market discrimination against American goods, the Reagan
Administration submitted a "think piece" on GATT reform in 1987
calling for enforceable timetables for resolving disputes and participation of nongovernment experts on such panels. By the time the
Uruguay Round concludes at the end of 1990, there will probably
be a greater role for GATT is scrutinizing member country trade
policies.
Trade in services.-Services exports-from insurance and banking to construction and transportation-are estimated to be worth
$400 billion per year. Most of that is generated from Western industrial countries. Despite the importance of services to the global
economy, however, these transactions are not covered by GATT.
The United States and its Western partners pushed hard for its inclusion in the Uruguay Round, and succeeded. The West's first priority is to establish a framework of commercial principles for individual service sectors, such as telecommunications and banking. In
November 1987, the United States came forward with a list of such
principles. Negotiations promise to be difficult. Advanced developing countries such as India and Brazil maintain that opening their
service sectors to international competition will undermine their
fledgling banking, computer, and telecommunications sectors.
Trade expansion does involve risks, but the United States has
made it clear that future access to its market depends on developing country willingness to make meaningful concessions on services.
Trade-related investment.-Foreign investment plays an increasingly significant role in global trade. Although investment regulations in host countries frequently distort trade flows, GATT's
present authority does not cover this area. If U.S. negotiators have
their way, GATT may soon have that authority-at least with respect to negotiating agreements to discourage host countries from
engaging in specific actions that restrict or distort trade flows.
Agriculture.-If the Uruguay Round succeeds in reducing distortions to trade induced by agriculture, it will constitute a major
breakthrough. On the surface, GATT members strongly support
such a move. In 1986 alone, agricultural subsidies were $15 billion

156
in Japan, $23 billion in the European Community, and $25 billion
in the United States. But progress in liberalizing agricultural trade
in 1987 has been slow. The main disagreement is between the
United States in alliance with the so-called "Cairns" group of developing and industrial countries versus the European Community.
In July of last year, the United States proposed to scrap all farm
subsidies that influence trade. The EC responded with a call for reductions in levels of government support, then seemed to reverse
itself by calling for a higher level of EC border protection for certain crops in the short term.
These negotiations will not-cannot-resolve all of America's
trade challenges. They can, however, provide a necessary political
stimulus to more open and dynamic global markets upon which
U.S. exports must depend.
Global expansion
The present imbalance in the global economy, between large U.S.
external deficits and our trade partner's growing external surpluses, is unsustainable. The challenge for the United States is to help
bring about a significant shift in import demand in the global economy-in a --Anner that helps the United States significantly
expand its export trade by ensuring continued global expansion.
There are three ways to achieve ti-is global readjustment, two of
which are unacceptable, and the other of which can only occur
with the full support of our trade partners.
Dollardevaluation
The United States has reached the point where further declines
in the dollar's exchange rate could stimulate higher domestic U.S.
inflation (through higher import prices), triggering a reduction in
America's living standard. In addition, continued declines in the
dollar's exchange rate value could trigger significant outlflows of
foreign capital from the United States, which would in turn have a
depressive impact on the U.S. economy. At this point, the dollar is
already below its 1980 exchange rate levels, when the U.S. current
account was still in rough balance. Rather than push for additional
devaluation, a more thoughtful U.S. posture should be one to encourage more sustained exchange rate stability over the medium
term in order to determine its effect on American trade competitiveness.
Slower growth
The United States can also bring about a reduction in its external deficits by slowing domestic demand. It "works." The last U.S.
trade surplus ($2.2 billion), it bears remembering, was registered in
1975 in the midst of a severe recession. But such a course would be
counterproductive for the world's largest and most dynamic economy. And such self-defeating policies-brought on by a combination
of high interest rates and increased protectionism, for examplecould severely constrict growth in foreign markets, which U.S. producers will increasingly rely on for their own export sales. Indeed,
with global economic interdependence, a strategy of slower U.S.
growth might backfire and no longer "work" at all.

157
Faster overseas growth
The most promising alternative for the United States, then, is to
encourage its surplus-heavy West German, Japanese, and newly industrializing Asian partners (Taiwan and South Korea) to shift
their growth strategies away from foreign markets by stimulating
their own. Is this possible? Yes, provided, of course, that our allies
recognize their own economic health depends on it, and are prepared to act accordingly.
Faster overseas growth would assist the United States in two
vital ways. First, alternative markets are needed for developing
country exports. Through 1986, the United States continued to pull
in about 60 percent of Third World manufacturing goods, while
Western Europe's and Japan's relative percentages were 28-30 percent and 6-8 percent over this period. Second, growth elevates the
prospects for expanded U.S. exports to European and Asian markets.
The U.S. trade position reflected significant improvements on a
volume basis in 1987, and should continue to do so in 1988. The key
is to be found in export growth, which this year is estimated to contribute one percent to domestic GNP growth. These encouraging
trends can be strengthened by U.S. policies designed to further liberalize the international trade system and support for growth promoting actions in our European, Asian, and European partners.
VI. THE EVOLVING U.S. ECONOMY

The ability of our free market system to adapt to change is a
principal reason why the United States is the world's largest economic power. Innovation and new technology create employment
opportunities and stimulate growth.
The composition and capacity of economic activity have changed
dramatically over the years. Throughout our history, new phrases
have been coined to describe an evolving U.S. economy, serving as
a convenient chronicle of change. Such terms as the industrial revolution, iron-horse era, New Deal, service economy, and emerging
information age each signify major developments. Farming obviously dominated American society before advances in mechanization and transportation unleashed tremendous potential for change
and growth. Franklin Delano Roosevelt expanded both the size and
role of government in the economy, a legacy whose economic benefits are still hotly defended and disputed today. The rise of the
service economy is evidence of economic forces shaping the present
as well as the future. In recent years, scientific breakthroughs in
microchips and data transmission have led to production technologies and information resources unimaginable even a generation
ago.
Change is not new. What is new is the speed at which the economy is evolving. The economy used to harness new inventions over
spans of decades, giving society the luxury of time to adapt. Today,
that adjustment period is much shorter. A modern-day Rip Van
Winkle awakening today after 20 years' sleep would discover an
alien world of remote-control VCRs, commonplace computers, instant-access global communications, life-reviving "miracle" drugs,
artificial hearts, genetic engineering, assembly-line robots, micro-

158

wave-popcorn, and moonrocks at the museum. These few examples
illustrate the countless ways the economy has expanded into new
frontiers bounded only by imagination.
Economic and employment trends
Over time jobs emerge and disappear; so do the goods and services produced by the people filling them. This natural occurrence is
evident in shifts in output and employment at the national level.
In the past 20 years, these shifts are very apparent.
The Federal Government collects information on gross national
product and employment by type of industry: agriculture (including
farming, forestry, and fisheries); mining; construction; manufacturing; transportation and public utilities; wholesale and retail trade;
finance, insurance and real estate (FIRE); services; and government. The following table lists output and employment for these
industrial categories.
TABLE VIl.-REAL GNP AND EMPLOYMENT BY INDUSTRY, 1966-86
Industry

Real
GNP
1986
(billions)

Agriculture...............................................
Mining......................................................
...........
Construction ..........
Manufacturing .....................
Transportation..........................................
Trade........................................................
.....................
FIRE
Services....................................................
Government..............................................

$62
115
194
498
174
326
271
254
305

U.S.total .....................

2,208

Percent
RealGNP
in
change
1986
1t66-86
(billions) GNP
$100
118
168
812
328
645
551
565
405
3,713

60.9
2.7
-13.4
63.1
88.5
97.4
103.4
122.5
32.7
68.2

EmploymentEmploymentPercent
1nt
annge
1986
1966
(millions) (millions) i966-86
4.0
0.6
3.3
19.2
4.2
13.2
3.1
9.5
10.8
72.9

3.2
0.8
5.0
19.2
5.3
23.8
6.3
23.1
16.7

-20.5
26.3
49.6
-0.1
27.1
79.9
106.2
142.9
55.2

109.6

50.4

arecalculated
changes
Percent
categories.
non-industry
GNP
andomitted
do nottotaldueto rounding
Columns
Dollars.
Note.-Real GNP=1982
data.
onprecise
ofAgriculture.
Department
Statistics,
of Labor
Bureau
Analysis,
ofEconomic
Bureau
Source:

Several observations are noteworthy and mostly good news.
Eight of the nine industries expanded output, the exception being
construction. Regarding employment, seven industries grew and
only two declined-manufacturing (very slightly) and agriculture
(substantially). In 20 years, real GNP grew an impressive 68 percent and overall employment increased by 50 percent. Since output
grew faster than employment, productivity increased, and U.S.
living standards were raised. These general trends serve as useful
benchmarks when analyzing changes among industries, because
growth has not been uniform. In fact, the contrasts are pronounced, as Chart VI.lshows.

159
Chart VI.1

OUTPUT GROWTH BY INDUSTRY
1966-1986, Percent Change in Real GNP
130120 1
110100

so70
60
50
40
30
20
10
-10
TOTAL

Agriculture

Mining Construction Manufac- Transpor- Trade
turing
tation

F IR E

Services Governmont

SOURCE- Table VA.
1

The service industry has emerged as the output growth leader,
expanding at nearly twice the rate of the other sectors taken together. Comprised of a broad array of activity, including legal,
health, education, repair, and personal and business services, such
strong growth comes as little surprise. Three other industriesFIRE, trade, and transportation-also grew faster than the economy on the whole.
Four other industries grew, but not as rapidly. Manufacturing
and agriculture posted growth rates exceeding 60 percent. The government sector expanded by one-third. Mining barely grew,
amounting to about 3 percent over the 20 year period. The significant price decline in commodities in the 1980s is one reason for
this slow growth. Construction was the only industry to actually
contract between 1-966 and 1986. A partial explanation of this decline is the inflation-prone nature of the industry. Construction
costs have skyrocketed over time, compelling businesses and individuals to economize on construction purchases.
If an industry grows faster than the economy overall, its share of
GNP increases. By the same token slower or negative growth implies a declining share. In this manner, services has grown from
11.5 percent GNP to 15.2 percent-the largest increase in the relative size of any industry. FIRE and trade both increased their
shares by about 2.6 pecent, and now account for 14.9 and 17.4 percent respectively. The relative sizes of transportation, rnanufacturing, and agriculture remained about the same. Three industries
saw their relative standing decrease. Mining fell from 5.2 percent
to 3.2 percent, Construction suffered the largest decline, from 8.8
percent of GNP in 1966 to 4.5 percent in 1986. Government's share
declined as well; its 1986 share, 10.9 percent, was 2.9 points lower
than the 1966 figure.
The employment picture does not coincide precisely with the
output performance of industries; Chart VI.2 illustrates this.

160
Thanks to technical advances, some industries have incorporated
new processes that have altered the amount and types of labor required. The use of new technology has varied considerably by industry; consequently the demand for labor among industries has
shifted. Nowhere is that demonstrated more dramatically than in
agriculture, the only industry where employment has decreased
markedly. The number of jobs has fallen by one-fifth, even through
agriculture output has climbed by three-fifths. The reason? Agriculture today utilizes better production equipment and management skills.
Chart VI.2

EMPLOYMENT GROWTH BY INDUSTRY
1966-1986, Percent Change
150
140
130120110100
908070
60
so
40
30
20
10
-10

-20
-30
TOTAL
SOURCE

Ariculure

Mining Coneuatiuon Manufao- Transportuhring tuton

Trade

F I RE

Services Govern
ment

Tabie V1.i

Manufacturing employment has been the object of considerable
discussion in the 1980s, particularly where plant closings have led
to high local unemployment rates. The impact of regional or sectorial job losses, however, has been far from devastating in the aggregate. Overall manufacturing employment is little changed from 20
years ago, but it peaked in 1981 and declined by 1 million before
rebounding again. By last year the manufacturing sector recovered
jobs lost in the 1981-82 recession. Even if its employemnt numbers
look fairly stable over time, employment in most other industries
advanced, shrinking manufacturing's share of total employment.
As the largest employment sector in 1966, its 26.4 percent share
fell to 17.5 percent in 1986, dropping it to third largest.
In the meantime, employment growth in wholesale and retail
trade and services has mushroomed, accounting for over 6 of every
10 new jobs formed. Both have overtaken manufacturing in terms
of employment share. FIRE has doubled its employment ranks
since 1966, but remains a smaller industry at about 6 percent of all
employment. Construction employment has grown at the same rate
as the economy despite the decrease in output. Government employment also grew at the same pace as overall job growth, but

161
would have been faster if job creation in the Federal sector had not
slowed in the 1980s.
Mining and transportation employment grew modestly over the
20 year period, at half the rate of the other industries combined.
Those two sectors had opposite results in output, however, Real
output in mining increased a paltry 3 percent, whereas transportation (which includes public utilities) grew nearly 90 percent. The
communications field is in this category, and obviously, the "information age" has left its mark. The explosion of communications
usage sine 1966 is reflected in a 225 percent increase in output.
Productivity implications
While this story has a happy ending, the plot is not all a bed of
roses. Economic performance is lackluster in the fastest growing industries. Chart VI.3 illustrates the problem.
Chart VI.3

GROWTH IN REAL OUTPUT PER EMPLOYEE, BY INDUSTRY
1966-1986, Percent Change in Real GNP/Employment
110

*-

100 --

90 -

so70 606403020100-10-20-30.0 TOTAL

A~iutr

iigCntuto

aaa-Tasorturing
tatlon

Trade

F IRE6 Services Govemn
ment

SOURCE: Table Vt-1

Interpreting this chart requires a word of caution for two reasons. First, this broad measure of productivity growth-change in
real GNP per employee-is not to be confused with the government's standard measure of productivity, which is output per hour.
Second, the economics and statistics professions recognize that
"productivity" is difficult to define and quantify for the services
sector, for which no tangible "product" exists, even though the improvement in quality over time is obvious to any observer. Thus,
any analysis of worker performance is subject to disagreement.
Nonetheless, this chart serves a useful illustrative purpose.
The chart reveals a tremendous variation in productivity performance among industries. Agriculture has outperformed all other
sectors because of tremendous technical application. In just 20
years output per worker has doubled. This productivity boom,
while great for the Nation and the world, has resulted in a sharp
decline in employment needs for the industry, and explains the disappearance of many family farms. Manufacturing is another industry where technology has radically altered the workplace. The

162
result is a 63 percent increase in production per employee. New
employment opportunities in manufacturing have been modest
over the time period, and regional migration of employment opportunities has severely affected many older industrial areas.
The transportation and public utilities industry reflects a mixture of strong productivity increases and fair job growth. Output
per worker, growing 48 percent, was quadruple the 12 percent rate
for the overall economy. However, employment growth for the
sector was just half the average for all industries. The trade sector's output per employee grew 10 percent, 2 points under the national average. Moreover, this slower productivity record affected a
growing number of employees: over 10 million jobs were created in
wholesale and retail trade. This expansion tended to reduce national average productivity statistics for the industry.
This trend of declining productivity performance in growing industries is even more revealing as the comparisons continue. The
remaining sectors declined in output per employee. FIRE, which
doubled its employment size, experienced a 1 percent decrease by
this measure. The service sector, which more than doubled with
the addition of 13 million new workers-one-third of all new jobswas hindered by an 8 percent fall in output per worker. Government had the next worst decrease, 14 percent, followed by mining's
19 percent decline. At the bottom of the list is construction. The
combination of an increase in employment and a contraction in
output caused a 42 percent plunge in real output per construction
worker.
The high employment growth sectors-services, FIRE, trade and
construction-show lower productivity performance. How has this
happened? As a partial explanation, the service economy and information sectors are composed of manv "infant industries" that naturally will endure "growing pains.' Inefficiencies and "trail and
error" problems can't be corrected as quickly as those on the assembly line. Nor can many services be mass-produced on the same
scale as products-at least at present.
The art and science of management, while centuries old, is just
now beginning to merge the skills of business organization and
function with human relations psychology, and sociology-important ingredients of service and information industries. New technologies are constantly making old workstation methods obsolete,
requiring adaptation and massive retraining. Service jobs often
demand sharp intellectual judgment. That comes from experience,
which now is being gained.
The U.S. international competitiveness issue is especially important in regard to sagging productivity in high-growth industries. At
present, foreign competition in services is not as intense as in manufacturing. Two areas of international competition are heating up,
however, financial services and insurance. In particular, the future
success or failure of Japanese investment firms in New York and
U.S. firms in Tokyo will serve as an early indicator of our ability to
perform amidst increasingly fierce competition
Sobering as this productivity portrayal is, it hasn't dampened
overall economic activity, as evidenced by five years of solid
growth. In 1987 real GNP growth of 4 percent and employment increases of 3 million have surprised most forecasters, and according

163
to the Blue Chip Economic Indicators, few are predicting a recession this year or even next.
Shortcomings in economic analysis

Tracking and interpreting the progression of the U.S. economy is
not straightforward. Over a period of just 10 or 15 years, job tasks
and economic output have changed enough to make classifications
and comparisons difficult. The traditional industrial categories
used by Federal data collectors were devised some 40 years ago.
Like most time-series data, the information is inherently biased
against the present and future. That is, new industries today are
placed somewhere in the old classification; old industries are not
retrofitted into a new classification scheme to better represent the
modern economy.
For example, at the broadest aggregate level, public utilities and
the transportation sector are lumped together. Serious economic
analysis may be impeded by combining such unrelated fields as nuclear electric generating, radio stations, overnight package service,
and semi-truck delivery. Historically speaking, this classification
may have served the needs of regulators since public utilities and
the transportation industry were usually governed by the same
overseers. However, there is little economic sense in this combination today. The current classification's treatment of services presents another problem-and one magnified by the fact that the
fastest growing sector is services. Services does not employ just
auto repairmen, beauticians, and the like. Rather, it is diversifying
into highly specialized and technical fields requiring vastly different skills. For that reason, a disaggregated services classification
would reveal more relevant and useful information about the U.S.
economy.
Nor are traditional industrial categories mutually exclusive, further clouding the picture of exactly what economic activity is occurring and how it is changing. As an illustration, a custodian's
contribution to GNP is allocated to manufacturing if he is employed by General Motors; however, his GNP contribution would be
allotted to services if he is an independent contractor providing
identical custodial work for General Motors. Thus, similar economic activity shows up under different industrial categories, which
can result in distorted analysis.
Occupation trends

Besides breaking down employment by industry, the Bureau of
Labor Statistics compiles the occupational composition of the labor
force. This information helps to overcome the problems cited above.
The six major occupational groups are managerial and professional
specialty; technical, sales and administrative support; service; precision production, craft, and repair; operators, fabricators, and laborers; and agriculture (farming, forestry, and fisheries). This listing, except for agriculture, also is an approximate ordering from
white collar to blue collar or from higher skilled occupations to
lower skilled. Table VI.2 lists the components of the major occupational groups for the years 1972 (the oldest data available by this
classification) and 1987.

84-405 0 - 88 - 7

164
TABLE VI.2.-EMPLOYMENT BY OCCUPATION 1972-87
Occupation
Executive/administrative/managerial ..........................
specialty.................................................
Professional
Technicians..
Sales..........................................................................
Administrative support...............................................
Service.......................................................................
production...................................................
Precision
Operators/assemblers ............................
Transportation............................................................
Handlers/laborers ............................
Farm/forestry/fisheries ..........
Total.............................................................

1972
1987
1987
1972
(thousands)(thousands)percent percent
11.8
13,312
8.9
7,278
12.8
10.8
14,426
8,830
3.0
2.4
3,346
.............................................................
1,928
12.0
13,480
10.4
8,566
16.2
16.0
18,256
13,125
13.4
15,054
13.2
10,831
12.1
12.6
13,568
10,347
7.1
7,994
10.5
8,600
4.2
5.0
4,712
4,143
4.3
5.7
4,779
4,641
3.1
4.7
3,507
3,843
100.0
100.0
112,434
82,132

1972-87
change

1972-87
percent

change
(thousands)
6,034
5,596
1418
4,914
5,131
4,223
3,221
-606
569
138
-336
30,302

82.9
63.4
73.66..
57.4
39.1
39.0
31.1
-7.1
13.7
3.0
-8.7
36.9

maynot adddueto rounding.
Note.-Numbers
Source:
Bureau
of LaborStatistics.

This table dramatizes how much the economy has changed in
recent years. Of the 30 million jobs created in this 15 year span,
over one-third were in managerial and professional specialty. Another third were in the next white collar group-technical, sales
and administrative support. Just two of the components actually
decreased in employment numbers. They were operators and assemblers, and agriculture; together, just under one million jobs
shifted into other sectors.
Chart VI.4 illustrates how growth rates varied considerably
among occupations over this period. Overall employment growth
from 1972 to 1987 was 36.9 percent. White collar occupations exceeded this average, and consequently their share of total employment increased as the previous table indicates. Although employment in blue collar occupations expanded by about three million
since 1972, these gains did not keep pace with overall growth.
Chart VI.4

EMPLOYMENT GROWTH BY OCCUPATION
1972-1987, Percent Change
90
80
70
60
50

40
30
20

10
0
.10
Executive Professional Tecrhnician Sales
SOURCE: Table Vt.2

Administra- Service Production Operator/ Transpor- Handler/ FarmFortive Support

Assembler

tation

Laborer estryFtRsh.

165
The policy dimension of economic evolution
The message in these output and employment numbers over time
is this: Private sector managers and planners, public policymakers
and the entire labor force must prepare for the inevitable and continual changes demanded by an evolving economy. So long as
human ingenuity creates new opportunities, the demands for an
adaptable workforce grow stronger.
Retraining, a concept that carries the connotation that new skills
are learned after old ones become obsolete, must give way to continual training as a job requisite. By updating skills regularly, unwanted career or employment disruptions can be minimized. The
transformation of the U.S. economy has one clear outcome: Without productivity increases, our living standards cannot continue
the strong advances to which Americans are accustomed. Taking
steps to improve productivity in the service economy is vital to our
future economic growth.
The private sector plays the crucial role in dealing with economic change. Our competitive free market system responds to change
efficiently. Adequate allocation of resources devoted to retraining
workers and reinvesting in capital is best done at the microeconomic level, where innovation and adaptive application flourish.
Labor and industrial planning at higher levels-particularly the
Federal-may have noteworthy goals, but accomplishing those
goals is another matter. History has shown that public sector planning often produces lackluster results at great expense to taxpayers. This has the "double negative" effect of reducing the private
sector's productive ability by wasted tax effort. Federal programs
that recognize and incorporate elements of the market stand the
best chance of success.
Understanding how our economy functions is integral to sound
economic policymaking. That task has become extremely challenging with the rapidity of change. This transition is not limited to
the U.S. domestic economy, either. The evolution of the global
economy presents a dual challenge for U.S. policymakers.
First, the U.S. economy is not only the world s largest, it also is
the most influential. Other nations cannot escape the effects of a
U.S. recession or expansion. The United States is both a provider of
capital abroad and a magnet attracting foreign capital. The dollar
is the most widely accepted unit of international exchange. Hence,
U.S. fiscal and monetary policies are influenced by the must take
into consideration international economic conditions. Second, competition and trade are becoming international in scope where domestic boundaries are becoming less significant in economic terms.
From an economic perspective, attempts by any country to make
national boundary distinctions in economic policymaking-such as
trade restrictions or export controls-result in lost opportunity.
The next chapter discusses in detail the necessity of a global perspective in understanding how changes in the U.S. economy are influenced by an emerging world economy. These relatively new
trends in international finance and trade present unique challenges and opportunities to virtually every participant in the global
arena. For most of history, the United States by virtue of its size
and wealth could grow internally and not worry about internation-

166
al economic policy considerations. Today, that is not necessarily the
case, as U.S. and foreign policymakers are dealing with a growing
economic interdependence, where open borders and free markets
are essential for mutual prosperity.
VII. TRENDS IN INTERNATIONAL FINANCE AND TRADE

The world has been changing rapidly in the last quarter of the
20th century. The process is accelerating. It is a truism that the
world is "growing smaller" with advances in telecommunications
technology, air travel, and trade-particularly international trade
in services.
The ecology movement in the 1970s coined a phrase, "the global
village," to describe the closer connections between industrial
growth in one part of the world and pollution effects in other
areas. Everyone is your neighbor. Thousands of miles or thousands
of millimeters: the distinction vanishes. This 1970s concept from
the ecology activists, however, was just a "weather report." The
"news report" in the 1980s is the industrial and financial integration of the world economy.
Any analysis of the current economic scene must address this
rapid cohesion of international society. The economist must avoid
old habits of mind, of viewing a single national economy as his subject, because the businessmen and consumers whose behavior he
wants to study do not limit themselves to those borders. Economics
is a behavioral science, and the economist must adopt the same
frame of reference as the market he studies. The proper frame of
reference is global in scope. There is a need to better understand
this rapidly chaning and expanding setting.
Increasingly what is traded between individuals as well as between nations is information, specialized management and engineering talent, professional services, financial services, and electronic machine tool components. Bulk trade in commodities internationally is still large and valuable-oil, grain, and heavy machinery-but small, high-value, high-technology components and the
human-value-added factor that leads to trade in semi-finished products are the most rapidly growing areas of international trade.
American companies today are not limited to local suppliers. Parts
likely can be found in Cleveland or Houston, or Taiwan or Belgium. In any case, delivery is only a telephone call and 24 hours
away.
It is not our purpose to pass judgment on whether these relatively new global finance and trade trends are good or bad-good or
bad for the United States, or any other country, or the world for
that matter. We do note, however, that free trade is a basic tenet of
our form of economic democracy. World-wide free trade is an acceptable and worthy U.S. international policy and goal. The U.S.
economy, being the envy of the world, has been the model of this
developing global economic freedom. Our purpose in this section of
the report is to describe and understand these trends and their implications and consequences, to ensure that the United States
maintains its leadership in this historic movement.

167
Modeling the world economy
Economists specializing in international trade theory have traditionally divided the analysis into a discussion of "closed economies," or those where external trade plays no role, and "open
economies." The distinction is a tool basically to allow teachers and
researchers to look carefully at the changes an opening of trade
will produce in an isolated society. In the 19th century, moreover,
it was clear the cost of transportation and communications tended
to focus trade and economic interaction among people who lived
near each other. Thus a further distinction between a "small open
economy" and a "large open economy" was invented.
A "small" open economy is simply open, but a "large" open economy is one that is semi-closed because it does most of its trading
within itself, due to transactions costs, which make external trade
often uncompetitive. The terms of trade are determined internally
by domestic competition, not externally by a world market. In such
an economy, a new product on the world scene would more likely
lead to new domestic manufacturing. In a small open economy, by
contrast, an increase in imports from original producers in whatever nation it may first have been introduced would be the more
likely market arrangement. Yet today, what are the new products?
They are increasingly specialized, non-generic innovations; they are
professional services, information, and integrated electronic systems that are more in demand as they become more microscopic
and easier to carry.
In the analysis of rapid economic change today and tomorrow,
the most important development in economic theory is the dissolution of the "large open economy" model. If an economic system is
legally open, there are no longer significant "transactions costs" to
shelter it from the world trading system. The distinctions of that
model are no longer needed-it is no longer accurate to view the
trading world as divided into large open economies, setting the
terms of trade and with significant degrees of freedom in areas
such as tax policy, monetary policy, and the role of government in
subsidizing favored members of society. It is significant that leaders of the Western industrialized nations now meet annually at an
economic summit and talk affirmatively about policy coordination,
although the degree of success has been unclear.
Global trends: the goods markets
The integration of the world's markets for goods is not as striking as the integration of the capital markets, but is nonetheless an
important feature of the changing nature of international economics. Just as capital now flows across increasingly transparent country borders, the national "identity" of goods produced and sold
around the world is also more difficult to see. Exports are becoming cooperative ventures among nations. Trade statistics are unable
to reflect this new reality and simply report the shipment of a good
from one port to another regardless of the number of nations involved in the production. As a result, annual or monthly trade balance statistics as indicators of international competitiveness are increasingly misleading.

168
The simple notion that an export is a good developed and produced in one country and sold to another country is becoming archaic. Now a product is often developed by a corporate management located in one country, with technology imported from another, manufactured in a third country, and marketed by jobbers
from a fourth to be sold around the world. More than ever before,
corporations are unrestrained by national boundaries in the production and sales processes. In the words of George Gilder,
"`

* * this is not trade but horizontal and vertical integration

across borders."
Examples of this integration abound. One prominent case is the
Hyundai Motor Company of Korea. The success of the Hyundai
Excel in the American market has highlighted the extent of integration in the world auto market. The Excel is the product of a
Korean-based company that is partly owned by Mitsubishi Motors,
which in turn is 24 percent owned by Chrysler Corporation. The
car is produced in Korea based on design technology from Japan
and is being marketed in the United States by Mitsubishi. The
building of a production facility in Canada further complicates the
issue of nationality.
Another example is the Honda corporation. Honda U.S.A. is increasingly an American company with a majority of workers and
sales in the United States. The strong yen, which makes direct investment here a bargain, is encouraging the company to continue
with its multi-billion dollar investment program in the United
States. Honda U.S.A., however, is not just manufacturing cars for
the American market. The company recently began exporting
American-made Hondas back to Japan.
The level of integration of the world's electronics industry is difficult to overstate. Virtually every major company is linked via
equity, licensing, joint venture, or marketing agreements. For example, AT&T and Olivetti, American and Italian corporations, respectively, are cooperating in the production and marketing of
computers. AT&T is providing state-of-the-art computer operating
systems and other technical advances, while Olivetti is contributing its marketing and distribution network to the joint venture.
The result of this cooperation is a better, more competitive product
that is available through an established and widely recognized
name. The arrangement clearly works to the benefit of both concerns.
This international cooperation in the production of goods obviously yields benefits. Corporations are not limited to their own
country in search of the best design technology, production facilities and marketing strategies. Consumers benefit by being able to
purchase a higher quality product. Prices also may be lower, or at
least more controllable, because international integration allows
firms to expand production in areas where currency trends are favorable.
Work by Robert Lipsey and Irving Kravis for the National
Bureau of Economic Research supports the benefits of integration.
They report that U.S. multinationals have had a competitive advantage over American companies without an international presence. In fact, their research shows that the worldwide share of
manufactured exports produced by U.S. multinationals has been

169
nearly stable since 1966 despite the appreciating dollar during the
early 1980s. One reason is that while the rising dollar hurt U.S.based exporters, it was a boon to overseas affiliates and units of
American multinationals. Depending on where the affiliate was located, the dollar bought up to 50 percent more in new plant and
equipment, marketing, and research and development. This study
refutes the notion that U.S. products have become uncompetitive
on world markets.
This success story, however, does not receive much attention because it is not reflected in the monthly trade statistics reported by
the Department of Commerce. Trade statistics simply report the
value of goods shipped from one port to another. They do not begin
to measure the degree of worldwide cooperation associated with the
production of goods. An export from a Texas instruments plant in
Japan back to its parent in the United States is counted as an
American import. Similarly, the shipment of a Honda Accord from
a plant in the United States back to Japan will appear as an American export.
This intracompany-international trade is not insignificant, as
shown in Tables VII.1 and VII.2. In 1985 (the latest available year
of data), over 26 percent of American exports were produced by foreign-owned companies located in the United States, while about 18
percent of U.S. imports came from American-owned affiliates operating overseas. Much of this trade is simply shipments from an affiliate to its parent. Even the current account is increasingly
unable to reflect complex corporate structures, although the current account balance is a better measure than the trade deficit because it captures earnings of overseas affiliates.
TABLE VII.l.-U.S. EXPORTS, 1985
[Dollars
in billions]
Exports
fromforeignTotal
U.S.
owntedcompanies
in merchandiser

Total.........................................................................................................

$56.4

$21

Manufacturing.12.9.....................................................................
1
2.
Chemicals
andallied products.5.2............................................
Machinery.......................................................................................
3
.2.
Wholesale
trade........................................................................................

Percent
oftotal

2.8

26.5

9
5.2
38.4

Automobiles
andequipment............................................................
3.3.
Metalsandminerals.......................................................................
.
. 10.8
Farmproduct rawmaterials.2..........................................................
20.3
Other
industries.............................................................................5.1.
Source:
"Foreign
Direct
Investment
in theUnited
States,"
U.S.
Department
ofCommerce.

TABLE V11.2.-U.S. IMPORTS, 1985
[Dollars
inbillions]
Imports
from

Total
U.S

companies
abroad merchandise
imports Perceot
oftotal
$62.3

$345.3

18.0

170
TABLE V1I.2.-U.S. IMPORTS, 1985-Continued
[Dollars
in billions]
Imports
from
Amerianowed
compres
froa

TtaUS
Toa!USimports oPrcentoftoa
offatal
merchandise

................................................................................................
Petroleum

1.
1 .3 ........................................

..........................................................................................
Manufacturing

4 .7 ...................................... 4..7.........

Machinery.......................................................................................
.......................................
equipment
Electronic
.......................................
Transportation equipment
........................................
manufacturing
Other

5.4.........................................
5.8 .
23.3 .
9.2

industries........................................................................................
Other

4.3.........................................

ofCommerce.
Investment
Abroad'
U.S.
Department
Source
"U.SDirect

An important implication of these statistical deficiencies is that
trade balances are not reliable indicators of the competitiveness of
a nation's industries. National competiveness is shaped by domestic
economic conditions such as labor costs and factor input prices, as
well as monetary exchange rates and factors determining product
quality such as technology and management. The competitiveness
of multinationals, on the other hand, is basically dependent on factors affecting product quality and design because such firms compensate for adverse domestic economic conditions by expanding
production where conditions are more favorable. In fact if a dynamic U.S. multinational company expands its market share both
here and overseas, but produces some vital components offshore,
the U.S. trade balance will worsen, all else equal, because shipments from foreign affiliates to U.S. parents will be reported as imports. Increased sales of their final products domestically will
simply not be included in trade statistics.
For these reasons it is questionable to place any undue importance on bilateral trade balances. A surplus or even balance in the
trade accounts does not necessarily imply international competitiveness. America's dynamic corporations must be as competitive as
possible and have access to foreign markets. Moreover, as international integration progresses, current statistical reporting of product movements will become increasingly unable to reflect economic
reality. Policies that are based on them will likely result in failure
or worse, economic waste and unemployment.
Global trends: the financial markets
The integration of the world financial markets is even more significant than the integration of goods markets. The gross movements of financial capital among world markets is estimated to be
10 times greater than the value of current account trade. The
reason why capital movements are important, of course, is because
capital movements-investment opportunities-direct world trade
and affect employment opportunities and wage rates in every
corner of "the global village." In 1985, a Study Group was established by the central-bank Governors of the Group of Ten countries
to examine recent innovations in, or affecting, the conduct of international banking. The report, Recent Innovation in International

171
Banking, under the chairmanship of Sam Y. Cross of the Federal
Reserve Bank of New York, was published by the Bank for International Settlements in April 1986. In addition to publishing for the
first time a compilation of statistics on trends not otherwise measurable, the report examines the growing unification of capital markets.
What is even more interesting, however, is the documentation in
the report of the growing role of currency substitution in world financial markets. The report begins a chapter on "Global Integration of Financial Markets" with the comment, "The roots of the
present trend towards a global integration of financial markets go
back to the 1960s when the development of the Euro-currency and
Euro-bond markets heralded the advent of truly international financial markets." Today there are financial instruments denominated in Euro-dollars, Euro-marks, Euro-yen, European Currency
Units (ECU), Special Drawing Rights (SDR), and other more exotic
multiple currency arrangements are legally possible.
The Bretton Woods system, established in 1944, envisioned a
world with free movement of trade, but autonomy of each nation's
investment policy and a world currency system in which sovereignty determined the name and the exchange rate of monetary units.
With all currencies based on the dollar instead of a gold reserve,
the Bretton Woods plan otherwise replicated the 19th century
system. When the free movement of reserves was jeopardized by
American policy in the 1960s, the rest of the world responded by
"denationalizing" the U.S. dollar-the Euro-dollar was born. Understanding the role of denationalized currency units helps explain
what drives currency volatility and persistent trade deficits in dynamic economies.
World capital movement finance world trade. Both economists
and non-economists think about trade with mental pictures we
take from daily life. Importing a shipload of automobiles from
Korea is conceptually the same as buying a bag of groceries at a
neighborhood market, but paying for them is quite a different
matter. Money itself may not even change hands, but capital
market instruments are sold and re-sold as an integral part of
buying and selling good and services.
Money, in the strict sense, does not earn interest, and nobodywith a large sum of money should let it sit idle. The more rapidly
money can be exchanged for an interest-bearing capital investment
until it is needed for payments, the better off any money manager
will be. Investment yield and risk of default, or unexpected reduction in yield, require continuous monitoring because circumstances
are always changing. This factor in capital management is the
same both in purely domestic and international finance.
Yet, world capital movements also do much more than finance
world trade. Exchange rate risks become an issue because no investor is limited by national boundaries or national currencies. The
prudent management of capital assets in a world market requires
an alertness to investment opportunities and exchange rate risks.
The more efficient international capital markets become, the more
capital instruments themselves acquire a role in the payments
system because they become more liquid, standardized, and fungi-

172
ble. It becomes possible directly to barter capital assets rather than
to sell them for money.
Financialflows in an open world economy
A growing economy, like a growing child, absorbs more from the
surrounding world. As outlined in Chapter IX, inflows of foreign
capital for investment in the United States have been called
"debt," but this misleading label includes direct investment such as
new factories, as well as stock market investments and bank deposits by foreigners. A growing economy also absorbs more of its own
production domestically, which is how production can grow while
exports lag.
Estimates of the total worldwide movement of capital can only
be estimates, of course, because capital movements are often just
changes in ownership of assets. Changes in ownership are typically
negotiated and executed privately, confidentially, and with no immediate visible effect on any physical or tangible asset. If a Japanese citizen residing in France should buy a dollar-denominated
General Motors bond from a German citizen residing in Buenos
Aires, paying with a check drawn on a Swiss bank and deposited in
another, there would be no recorded international capital movement. Yet, to make the world's accounts balance, there ought to be
debit and credit entries to show a capital outflow from the United
States to Germany and an inflow to the United States from Japan.
The only reportable transaction might arise if the payment were in
U.S. dollars, and each Swiss bank used a different New York correspondent bank to hold its Euro-dollar reserves. If only one bank,
however, in Switzerland or New York, were to debit one account
and credit another, the movement of capital would be invisible.
The significance of this focus on the role of capital movements is
it changes the way we must think about monetary and fiscal
policy. In the Keynesian as in the neo-classical economic framework, the government is an agent external to the system. Government spending is an autonomous expenditure; the creation of reserves by a monetary authority injects exogenous liquidity. The
pace and level of economic activity is driven by the transfer of command over resources by these autonomous expenditures and/or ex-ogenous injections of capital market liquidity. In a world of open
economies, however, the one-day movement of capital in and out of
a nation may exceed changes in government spending and monetary reserve creation for an entire year. These market actions that
inject or withdraw capital from an economy have an autonomous
or exogenous impact.
With the end of inflation and the recession of 1982, and the 1981
tax cuts, the United States has become the world's most powerful
investment magnet, as tax rates plunged and real interest rates
soared. U.S. manufacturing output increased at an annual rate of
3.4 percent from 1980 to 1986, up from only 2.8 percent annually
the previous decade. During the Reagan Administration, manufacturing productivity has increased 31.6 percent, whereas in the
seven years, 1973-80, it grew 8.5 percent. At the same time, unit
labor costs have fallen by more than 40 percent. Rapid U.S. economic growth has attracted foreign investment and increased im-

173

ports of capital goods, just as foreign capital has further impelled
the U.S. growth.
The result was that capital, which in the 1970s had been pouring
out of the United States at an annual net rate of more than $27
billion per year to avoid rising tax rates and negative real interest
rates, began to be invested in the United States itself, as Table
VII.3 illustrates. The realization that many.loans to Latin America
and the Third World were bad loans, which could not be repaid,
contributed significantly to the abrupt halt in capital outflow as
well.
TABLE VII.3.-CAPITAL AND TRADE INFLOWS, 1982-86
[In billions
ofdollars]
Year
1982
.............................................................
1983...............................................................
1984
.............................................................
1985
.............................................................
1986
...............................................................
1987.:.

Netcapital
inflows
-27.1
+35.5
+79.1
+94.4
+117.6
+138.8

Current
account
deficit
-9.1
-46.6
- 106.5
-117.7
-141.4
- 160.7

Source:
Department
ofCommerce.

Even more significant than the change in America's role from
the world's major investor to the world's best investment opportunity has been the emergence of Japan. In a very few years, the
large volume of capital investment from Japan has had a major
effect on world capital markets. Prior to the 1980s, major investing
nations such as Japan enforced capital controls that inhibited their
investment outside Japan. The worldwide diversification of Japan's
accumulated savings in the short period since eliminating capital
export restrictions in the 1980's has given that nation a visibility
much greater than if the entry of Japanese investments into world
capital markets had been gradual over 30 years. Much less attention is given to growing investment holdings by Europeans, Canadians, Americans, and other industrialized countries around the
world, but the trend toward international diversification has been
powerful and accelerating.
Thus, one of the most important factors explaining movements of
exhange rates, and capital, is the investment opportunities in different parts of the world. Just as various states and regions of the
United States have different growth rates, which are reflected in
real estate values, unemployment rates, and net increases in population, due to factors such as raw material and energy prices, regulatory policies, and tax rates, so the international investors favor
more laisse-faire climates and avoid jurisdictions more adverse to
economic development.
Even more important, policy changes that will affect the demand
for capital assets-tax rate changes, attempts to manipulate interest rates or exchange rates, or even regulatory reforms that change
capital market transactions costs-will drive a currency up or
down. But exchange rate movements are indicators of favorable or
unfavorable policy, not causes. Chapter IX discusses in fuller detail

174
recent experience with foreign capital movement into the U.S.
economy.
At a time when international concern about trade restriction
sentiment in the U.S. Congress is a serious topic of discussion, it
must be remembered that Euro-dollars and Eurobonds-the external-international use of American dollars-were a direct response
to the interest equalization tax of the Kennedy-Johnson Administration. That tax was the last, futile effort by the U.S. Government
to enforce a segregation between domestic and international capital markets. Instead, it catapulted the world monetary system into
a new era of transnational currencies that have permanently internationalized the capital markets. The general rule is that no manmade barrier to human will, in the pursuit of opportunity, can long
endure. A movement to protectionism by the United States today
would no doubt have just as unforeseen and completely defeating
results as well.
VIII. THE DOLLAR IN THE WORLD ECONOMY

Traditional thinking in monetary theory has raised many questions about the determination of exchange rates and the relationship between monetary growth rates, interest rates, and exchange
rates. It needs a new look. The deregulation of capital markets and
floating exchange rates have upset many old patterns and expectations. Yet, there are still too many issues unresolved to support a
new unified theoretical paradigm. Our observations here, just as in
Chapter VII, are intended to contribute to a framework for further
research.
In the classicial, gold-standard model, a trade deficit implied an
export of bullion, with a decrease in the money supply; rising interest rates would cause a slowdown of growth in the deficit nation,
imports would fall and exports rise. Domestic capital formation and
savings would decline. A trade surplus would imply an import of
bullion, falling interest rates, and rising investment and growth.
But in the classical model, taxes and regulatory policy are assigned
minor and passive roles and capital movements are relatively small
in comparison with domestic savings. Investment opportunities are
neither created nor destroyed by government policy.
Today, international capital movements are much larger than
domestic savings and capital formation, and policy intervention is
much more important and unpredictable than it was in the classical, gold-standard world. Indeed, government policy is one of the
most important factors in determining the profitability of investments. In this emerging picture, it is the capital inflow in pursuit
of growth opportunities that stimulates a trade deficit, and it is the
specter of a policy-motivated devaluation of currency, or increase
in taxes or government regulation, which panics a stock market
crash as foreign holders rush to sell.
Whereas real factors such as changes in the trade balance or
rates of economic growth, as well as purchasing power parity, must
have an influence in the determination of exchange rates, the
value of the dollar in terms of other world currencies is actually
determined by billions of individual transactions, in a world
market continuously monitoring for potential policy surprises by

175
the U.S. Government or other major nations. Indeed, the market
participants are often more concerned to second-guess the impact a
news release may have on policymakers than to evaluate the
impact on consumers and producers of real, newsworthy events.
Forces influencing exchange rates
The volatility of exchange rates and the seeming absence of an
equilibrium value for currencies in terms of each other is understandable only in the context of the international capital market.
A "falling dollar" is not a phenomenon of the same nature as the
falling price of corn or soybeans, because commodities have an ultimate consumption demand their spot price reflects. In the case of
currencies, however, it is the demand for the financial and real
assets denominated in a currency that is reflected in the exchange
rate, not demand for the currency itself. Capital inflows-the increase in demand for assets denominated in a currency-will cause
a currency to rise, and capital outflows (decrease in demand) will
cause it to fall.
No one believes there is an "equilibrium value" of a share of
stock on the New York Stock Exchange that could not change the
next moment. In the international capital market, the "dollar" is
like a share of stock-except it is actually a filter, a lens, through
which the value of corporate shares or bonds are seen by investors
who measure their gains and losses in yen, marks, pounds, or
ounces.
The powerful effect of policy anticipations in the international
currency markets can be seen in the factors contributing to the
stock market plunge of last October. Four days before that event,
Treasury Secretary Baker was widely quoted as suggesting a devaluation of the dollar against the German mark might be considered. In the manner common to rumors, this remark was misinterpreted and exaggerated, but consider the effect such an official
policy would have on foreign holdings in the U.S. stock market.
Even in an unchanged market, in terms of domestic currency, an
impending decline in the foreign exchange value of the currency
would be a real decline to the foreign investor. If a German investor in the United States were persuaded the dollar would drop
from 1.75 to 1.50 marks, in his view a share of stock selling for
$100 is going to decline from 175 German marks to 150 marks,
even if its dollar price were unchanged. Those who trade the markets would attempt to sell before such a decline, and as selling
pressure began to mount in the market there could be a decline in
the dollar price, and even domestic investors, with no foreign exchange risks, would want to sell before the market declined further. A cascading effect could thus be triggered by the belief an official devaluation of the currency might be the new government
policy. The official report on the October crash by the Securities
and Exchange Commission indeed verifies heavy selling by foreign
mutual funds at the opening bell on Black Monday.
The dollar in the internationalbanking system
The demand for dollars for international bank payments represents another source of volatility in the capital markets. The U.S.
dollar is the principal currency in international trade, and every

176
major bank outside the United States offer depository services to
clients denominated in dollars. The growth in dollar-denominated
deposits worldwide has been phenomenal in the past 20 years.
Table VIII.1 shows the magnitude of this growth in international
financial services.

TABLE VIII.1.-ECONOMIC ACTIVITY, INTERNATIONAL TRADE, AND INTERNATIONAL BANKING, SELECTED YEARS, 1964-85
Amount
(billions
ofU.S.
dollars
atcurrent
prices
andexchange
rates)

Indicator

Gross
domestic
product:
World
excluding Soviet
BlocI.,

1972

1964

,.........

International tradein goodsandservices:
Worldexcluding SovietBloc'...............................
International banking:
BISseriesfor net international bankcredit, BISreporting area2,.................................
Morgan
Guranty
seriesfor grosssizeof international banking market 3,....................

$1,605
188
12
20

$3,336

1980

1983

1985

Compound
annual
rateofgrowth
(percent)
1964-72

1972-80

1980-85

1964-85

$10,172

$10,140

$12,825

9.6

15.0

4.7

10.4

463

2,150

1,986

2,190

12.0

21.2

.4

12.4

122
208

810
1,559

1,240
2,253

1,485
2,598

33.6
34.0

26.7
28.6

12.9
10.8

25.8
26.1

IMF,"International
Financial
Statistics,
Supplement
onOutput
Statistics,"
No.8 (Washingotn,
D.C.:
IMF,1984),
anddatafromIMF,"International
Financial
Statistics
Yearbook
1986."Boththeoutput
andtrade
series
incorporate
rough
estimates
forsome
countries.
"Trade"
isa country
agqregation
ofstatistics
forexports
ofgoods
andservices.
The1985
figures
arepartlyestimated
byBryant.
2 Bank
for International
Settlements.
Annual
Repots"
andquarterly
statistical
releases
on international
banking
develonments.
Inconcept
thisseries
netsoutinterbank
redepositing
among
thebanks
in thereporting
area.
Thereporting
areain
recent
years
hasincluded
banks
in theGroup
of Tencountries
plusLuxembourg,
Austria,
Denmark,
Ireland,
andtheoffshore
branches
of U.S.banks
in theBahamas,
theCayman
Islands,
Panama,
Hong
Kong,
andSingapore.
Banks
in Finland,
Norway,
andSpain
wereaddedto the reporting
areas
as of December
1983.Onlythe Group
of Tencountries
wereincluded
in the reporting
areain the 1960s
andearly1970s.
Thefigures
for 1964and1972arepartlyestimated
by Bryant.
uMorgan
Guaranty
TrustCompany
of NewYork"World
Financial
Markets,"
various
issues,
Thismeasure
differs
fromthe BISseries
fornetinternational
bankcreditin twomajor
ways:it includes
redepositing
among
thereporting
banks
andit
defines
thereporting
areatocover
a larger
number
of countries
andbanks.
Thefigures
for1964and1972
arepartly
estimated
byBryant.
Note.-This tableappeared
in International
Financial
Intermediation
byRalph
C.Bryant
(Washington,
DC:TheBrookings
Institution,
1987).
Source:
IMF.
1i-ZI
--a

178
As world trade and financial transactions have expanded, bank
reserves maintained by foreigners in the United States have expanded. In 1970, foreign deposits in U.S. banks were less than $29
billion. By 1986, foreign deposits were $477 billion-more than a 19
percent annualized rate of increase. Foreign banks that offer
dollar-accounts to their clients need to maintain dollar reserves in
correspondent banks in the United States. Any bank that opens a
customer account or makes a loan must anticipate the full or partial withdrawal of funds by the customer, as he uses the account
for payments. Every disbursement, unless it should happen to be to
another customer of the same bank, requires the out-payment of
reserves. The payment could, of course, be in the form of currency,
but his is rare in legitimate international transactions. Thus, a
check or other instrument would be drawn in "U.S. dollars" on one
foreign bank and deposited in another. The bank into which the deposit is made would collect the funds through its U.S. correspondent bank from the correspondent bank of the payer.
In general, the international banking system operates on the
basis of maintaining prudential reserves adequate to cover any reasonable demand for payments. Prudential reserves in a banking
system without a central bank as "lender of last resort" would
have to be, in some circumstances, far greater than required reserves in a banking system regulated by and supported in its emergencies by a central bank.
These U.S. bank obligations to foregin banks are greater than all
other private-sector foreign investments combined (see Table IX.2),
yet they are not a "debt" for which repayment will ever be requested-because they are the working capital, or prudential reserve, of
the Euro-dollar banking system. The reserve is no more likely to be
drained or reduced, i.e. "withdrawn," than the natural gas supply
in the underground pipes of a modern city is likely to be drained or
reduced. The dollars in this "monetary base for the Eurodollar"
are demanded as dollars per se, as tools of the banker's trade, just
as nuts and bolts are held as inventory-reserves-by a machine
shop. Indeed, as the world economy expands, and if the dollar retains its relative proportion in the Euro-currency markets, the
demand for bank reserves will continue to expand the level of foreign deposits in U.S. banks.
The monetary reserves that overseas bankers need to conduct
their business, in the currency of their customers' preference, if it
is the U.S. dollar, can only be obtained by selling goods or services
to someone in the United States and receiving payment in local
currency here. In this regard, money itself becomes an export commodity-a commodity that is produced by the Federal Reserve
rather than U.S. industrial or agricultural workers. This contributing factor to the current account deficit is, or course, a classification problem in the national income accounts, not a true trade
issue: monetary reserves are not counted as an export.
As a source of volatility, however, the foreign demand for Eurodollars in trade financing is much more a matter of business discretion than the dollar's use in domestic U.S. business. The choice of a
currency for pricing trade goods or financing or insuring them
internationally is not exactly restricted by law. It is more likely to
be a function of the nationality or location of the banks through

179
which the trade is financed, based on consideration of interest
rates in different currencies, exchange rate stability, ect. Again,
the concerns of the financial community about any "policy surprise" are an important driving force affecting demand for a currency and capital assets denominated in it.
Policy consequences
The implications for monetary theory in today's world of Eurocurrencies and large, volatile shifts of financial capital across borders is profound. In the Keynesian as in the neoclassical economic
framework, government spending is autonomous and drives national income; the creation of reserves by a monetary authority injects
exogenous liquidity. The pace and level of economic activity is
driven by the transfer of command over resources by these autonomous expenditures and/or exogenous injections of capital market
liquidity. In a world of open economies, however, the change in
preference to hold assets denominated in dollars rather than yen,
or other currencies, affects the exchange rates and can have violently disturbing impacts on capital asset prices and the movement
of capital, overwhelming the best intended plans of central bankers
or fiscal policy planners.
The monetary policy of the United States is increasingly constrained by the necessity to stabilize the foreign demand for the
dollar as an international currency unit. From the standpoint of
sovereignty, or course, the independence of action by our government is reduced in this world market environment.
IX. U.S. FOREIGN DEBT

Much has been made of America's status as a "debtor nation."
Observers have compared the U.S. economy to Latin American
debtors that are dependent on foreign capital to stave off collapse.
The conventional wisdom is that we have borrowed foreign funds
for a consumer spending binge and will have to suffer a lower
standard of living to service the debt. Some have even claimed that
our profligacy has made an economic collapse inevitable.
This chapter refutes such a belief. Investors around the world
are shipping capital across increasingly meaningless boundaries on
the world map to seek the highest returns. Consumers share in the
benefits as well. The conventional view of an economy is nationalistic, as if one nation's economic system could be observed apart
from the world economy. Today, however, that is an incomplete
frame of reference.
Just as a state's successful economic development strategy will
attract investment from other regions of the country, so will a nation's successful economic policies and dynamic growth attract capital from slower growing regions of the world. During the 1980's
America has experienced sustained, low inflation growth and thus
has been the beneficiary of foreign capital inflows from around the
world. It is this inflow that has caused our "indebtedness." But
concern about this new status has been exaggerated in many quarters. To separate rhetoric from reality it is necessary to get a clearer picture of America's net investment position.

180
The nature of America's indebtedness
America is called a debtor nation because in 1985, for the first
time since World War I, the recorded value of foreign investment
here surpassed the value of our investment over-seas. As shown in
Table IX. 1, America's "net debt" position expanded from $112 billion in 1985 to $263 billion in 1986 (the latest available data) and
will probably exceed $400 billion for 1987.
One caveat, however, is that measurement of America's net investment position is not very exact. The problem is that some of
the investments on the balance sheet are recorded at their current
estimated "market" value, while others are listed at "book" value,
the historical value of the asset at the time the investment was
made. Because most foreign direct investment in the United States
is of newer vintage than America's investment abroad, our foreign
liabilities, and thus our "indebtedness," are overstated. Attempts to
correct the distortion reveal that we still are net creditors to the
world. Nevertheless the trends, if not the levels represented by the
figures in Table IX.1, are probably accurate.
TABLE IX.1.-INTERNATIONAL INVESTMENT POSITION OF THE UNITES STATES, YEAREND 1970-86
ofdollars]
[In billions
investment
Direct

'
All investment

Year
1970 .........
1971 .........
1972 .........

1973 .........
1974 .........
1975 .........
1976 .........
1977 .........
1978 .
1979 .
1980 .........
1981 .........
1982 .........
1983 .........
1984 .........
1985 .........
1986

Assets Lies
165
176
199

222
256
295
347
319
......... 448
......... 511
607
720
825
874
896
949
......... 1,068

107
134
162

Net Assets Liabil- Net
ities
ities
59
56
37

48
175
59
197
74
221
84
264
73
306
76
372
95
416
106
501
141
579
137
688
90
784
4
892
1,061 -112
1,331 -263

stock
Corporate

instruments
Debt

Assets Liabil- Net Assets Liabil- Net
ities
i~~~~~~~~ties
6

76
83
90

13
14
15

62
69
75

7
8
11

27
31
39

-21
-23
-29

72
78
88

66
89
108

-10
-21

101
110
124
137
146
163
188
215
228
208
207
211
230
260

21
25
28
31
35
43
55
83
109
125
137
165
185
209

81
85
96
106
111
120
133
132
120
83
70
47
45
51

10
9
10
10
10
11
15
19
8
19
26
27
40
51

34 -24
24 -15
36 -26
43 -34
40 -30
42 -31
48 -34
65 -45
64 -47
76 -58
96 -71
94 -68
124 -85
167 -116

99
125
150
189
211
262
297
362
463
587
630
647
668
746

121
148
158
190
232
287
313
353
406
487
551
632
752
955

-21
-23
-8
-1
-21
-25
-17
9
57
100
79
15
-84
-209

butnotelsewhere.
in totalassets
year)areincluded
each
$tt billion
(about
goldholdings
Official
bonds.
andcorporate
andliabilities,
bankassets
securities,
government
Datainclude
of
Commerce.
Department
U.S.
Business,
ofCurrent
Survey
Source:

Not all liabilitiesare debt
A concern about the increased capital inflow is that we are only
borrowing to finance our budget deficit or for a binge of consumer
spending on foreign imports. A closer look at the type of investments made by foreigners shows that this perception is not true.
Foreign investment has been broad based. Moreover, not all U.S.
foreign liabilities are debt. As shown on Table IX.1, 28 percent of
foreign liabilities at the end of 1986 consisted of direct investment
and investment in. the stock market. These equity investments are
not debt in the- conventional sense because there are not any fixed,

181
regular service payments. Foreigners only receive a return if the
investment is profitable.
At the end of 1986, the United States was still a net creditor in
direct investment by $51 billion. We have traditionally been creditors because, for a long time after World War II, American companies in search of markets, raw material, and cheap labor invested
abroad whereas foreign companies did not find it as profitable to
invest here. In recent years, however, the situation has reversed
due to a favorable climate for starting and expanding business investment in the United States. This investment came, despite relatively high U.S. interest rates, because of strong economic growth
and the Economic Recovery Tax Act of 1981, which substantially
reduced the effective tax rate for foreign as well as American corporations. Studies by Daniel Frisch and David Hartman report for
the National Bureau of Economic Research that "a one percentage
point increase in the net rate of return caused by a decline in the
effective local corporate tax rate increases the investment in that
country more than 30 percent over a four-year period."
Like direct investment, foreign capital inflows to the stock
market are an equity investment with no guaranteed return. As
demonstrated by last October's stock price crash, foreigners are
just as vulnerable to market reverses as American investors. At
the end of 1986 we were "net debtors" by $116 billion in corporate
stock. This debtor position is not surprising because foreigners traditionally have found our highly developed stock market a profitable place for their funds while the relatively underdeveloped equity
markets abroad provided fewer opportunities for American investors. Our net debt expanded during the 1980s as foreigners joined
American investors on the stock market's bull run. For foreign investors, the rising dollar enhanced the already attractive American
stock market. Ironically, the stock market crash last October resulted in lower U.S. foreign indebtedness, because the value of the
foreign stock portfolio in this country was reduced.
The debt dilemma
Many people are concerned that a large proportion of U.S. foreign liabilities is debt, not equity, which we are committed to servicing in fixed payments at regular intervals. This balance in debt
instruments changed dramatically from a positive $100 billion in
1982 to a negative $209 billion in 1986. Table IX.2 shows the U.S.
private and public sector balances in debt instruments.

TABLE IX.2.-DEBT INSTRUMENTS, U.S. INTERNATIONAL INVESTMENT POSITION BY SECTOR, YEAREND 1970-86
ofdollars]
[In billions

.................
1970 .....
1971 ......................
1972......................
.................
1973 .....
1974 ......................
......
1975................
1976.......................
1977 ......................
1978 ......................
1979 ......................
1980 ......................
1981 ......................
1982 ......................
.........
1983.............
1984 ......................
1985 ......................
1986......................

AssetsI
36
36
39
42
43
46
53
57
61
66
79
87
97
102
109
120
127

Liabilities Net
21
47
56
57
62
72
88
123
150
134
148
157
172
185
216
243
291

nonbank
private
Total

bank
Private

Government
Year

15
-11
-17
- 16
-20
-26
-35
-66
-89
-67
-69
-69
-75
-83
-107
-123
-164

D
Assets Liabilities

14
17
21
27
46
60
81
93
131
157
204
294
405
435
446
447
506

29
23
30
39
60
59
71
78
101
141
151
192
253
304
338
381
477

Net
-16
-6
-9
-12
-14
1
10
14
30
16
52
101
152
131
107
66
29

Assets Liabilities Net
23
25
28
31
36
44
55
62
70
73
78
82
85
93
92
102
113

onforeigners.
claims
financial
theydonotrepresent
because
areexcluded
thisperiod)
throughout
$11billion
(about
Official
goldholdings
abroad.
U.S.loans
Mostly
in U.S.banks.
deposits
Mostly
foreign
ofCommerce.
U.S.Department
Business,
ofCurrent
Survey
Source:

16
19
23
25
25
27
31
31
36
39
54
57
57
62
79
128
188

6
7
6
6
11
17
24
31
34
35
24
25
25
31
13
-26
-75

andother
corporate
nonbank
Private
bonds
Assets Liabilities Net
14
16
17
17
19
25
35
39
42
42
43
46
46
58
62
73
80

8
9
12
13
11
13
18
19
20
20
24
26
26
35
48
99
161

7
6
5
4
8
12
17
21
22
22
20
20
20
23
14
-25
-81

Others
Assets Liabilities Net
9
10
11
14
17
18
21
22
28
31
35
36
36
35
30
28
33

9
9
11
12
14
14
13
12
16
19
30
31
31
27
31
29
27

0
0
1
2
3
4
7
10
12
13
4
5
5
8
-1
-1
6

0

183
Contrary to popular belief, the private sector and not the Federal
Government is the source of most of its country's foreign debt obligations. The private banking and non-baniking sectors alone account for $665 billion in debt instruments, or half of all outstanding liabilities to foreign investors. Moreover, the increase in these
private sector debt instrument liabilities accounts for over 50 percent of the $400 billion change in our total investment balance between 1982 and 1986.
Corporate bonds account for the bulk of non-bank private sector
liabilities. Foreign investment in corporate bonds skyrocketed
during the 1980s from $26 billion in 1982 to $161 billion 1986. The
attractiveness of bonds and other debt instruments was enhanced
in 1984 with the repeal of a 30 percent withholding tax on interest
earnings by foreigners. Bonds are debt in that they must be served
regularly, but the capital inflows to this market expanded the productive capability of American businesses and enhanced their ability to service the bonds. Furthermore, the bonds would have to be
serviced on a regular basis whether the bondholders were foreign
or American.
The banking sector accounts for half of foreign liabilities, and
those are primarily Eurodollar reserves, as explained in Chapter
VIII. As shown in Table IX.2, U.S. banks were still net creditors to
the world at the end of 1986, although the balance had disminished
to $29 billion from $152 billion in 1982. U.S. banks were substantial
net creditors during the early 1980s because of their massive lending to the Third World. The debt crisis that began in 1982 caused
U.S. banks to retrench while the frenzied demand for dollars expanded foreign deposits in American banks. It is curious why many
believe it was more desirable for American banks to be net creditors burdened by increasing exposure to shaky foreign borrowers
than it is for them to be net debtors with an inflow of foreign capital. Granted, the banks must "service" this capital with interest
payments, but it is unlikely that an increased inflow to the banking system from domestic depositors would arouse similar debt
service worries.
The government, not suprisingly, is a chronic net debtor to the
world. This debt reflects the fact that the U.S. dollar is the most
widely used international currency and U.S. Treasury securities,
which have the full backing of the U.S. Government, are considered the safest investment in the world. Obviously, they are attractive to both private and public sector foreign investors. Foreign
central banks hold U.S. Treasury securities as a part of their reserves, they use to cover shortfalls in foreign exchange earnings
and to intervene in foreign currency markets to manage the movements of their own currencies against the dollar. While during the
early 1980s the purchases of government debt by foreigners were
caused by relatively high interest rates and the appreciating dollar,
more recently the major buyers have been foreign central banks attempting to stem the slide of the dollar against their currencies to
cushion its effect on their domestic economies.
The U.S. Government is the villain in most tales describing
America's indebtedness. Most people believe that rather than stimulating investment foreign capital is financing our Federal budget
deficit. Contrary to popular belief, however, foreigners do not hold

184
the bulk of our government debt. In fact, as shown in Table IX.3
foreigners only held 14.6 percent of total U.S. Treasury debt at the
end of the third quarter of 1987, compared with 16.7 percent in
1981.
TABLE IX.3.-U.S. GOVERNMENT SECURITIES HOLDINGS, 1981-87-l1l END-OF-PERIOD LEVELS
in billions]
(Dollars
tota o
Heldby
Total
outstanding foreigners foreigners

Year

$829.7
991.1
1,177.7
1,376.6
1,600.3
1,815.4
1,896.1

1981 ...............................................
1982 ...............................................
1983 ...............................................
1984 ...............................................
1985 ...............................................
1986 ...............................................
...............................................
1987-111

$138.6
151.4
167.1
194.8
214.4
257.2
277.3

16.7
15.3
14.2
14.2
13.4
14.2
14.6

of Governors.
Board
Reserve
Federal
accounts.
Flowoffunds
Source:

More revealing, however, are the capital flow figures shown on
Table IX.4. Of the $910 billion in foreign capital inflows between
1981 and 1987, only 18 percent went for U.S. Treasury securities to
finance the government debt and nearly half of those flows came in
1986 and 1987 from foreign central banks trying to stem the slide
of the dollar against their currencies. By contrast, nearly 40 percent of total capital inflows between 1981 and 1987 went for direct
investment in American businesses and corporate securities. This
boon to investment has been all but overlooked by most critics.
TABLE IX.4.-U.S. INTERNATIONAL TRANSACTIONS
ofdollars]
[Inbillions
overseas
outflow
Capital

States
totheUnited
inflow
Capital
Yean

1975 ....
1976 .......
1977 .......
1978 .
1979 .
1980 .......
1981 .......
1982 .......
1983 .......
1984 .......
1985 .......
1986 .......
1987 .......

Total I

...

.......
.......

Bank
Dinect U.S.
U.S.
Total
liabilnTeaury inveti conporate
itins-ment
ment secunisecunities
ties

$7.3
$15.7
12.1
36.5
30.7
51.3
25.8
64.0
-17.4
38.8
12.3
58.1
7.9
83.0
12.8
93.7
15.7
84.9
27.7
102.5
19.6
129.9
43.0
213.4
38.8
202.6

$2.6
4.3
3.7
7.9
11.9
16.9
25.2
13.8
11.9
25.4
19.0
25.1
40.6

$2.5
1.3
2.4
2.3
1.4
5.5
6.9
6.1
8.2
12.6
51.0
70.8
42.1

-$1.6
12.0
7.5
21.7
39.8
10.6
33.4
63.9
50.8
34.4
41.6
77.4
77.9

$39.7
51.3
34.8
61.1
64.3
86.1
111.0
121.1
49.1
22.3
31.4
96.0
63.8

bank Other
Uinect Foreign U.S.
outflows
I
invest- securitin assets

$14.2
11.9
11.9
16.1
25.2
19.2
9.6
2.4
0.4
2.8
17.3
28.0
38.2

$6.2
8.9
5.5
3.6
4.7
3.6
5.7
8.0
6.8
4.8
7.5
3.3
3.7

$13.5
21.4
11.4
33.7
26.2
46.8
84.2
111.1
29.9
11.1
1.3
59.0
33.4

$5.8
9.1
6.0
7.7
8.2
16.5
11.5
-0.4
12.7
3.6
5.3
5.7
-11.5

omitted.
smallcategories
several
will notsumtothetotalbecause
Components
securities.
Treasury
of U.S.
purchases
privtesector
andforeign
Government
bothforeign
Includes
securities.
Treasury
otherthanU.S.
securities
government
some
3 Includes
banks.
U.S.
in
deposits
foreign
Mostly
abroad.
U.S.bankloans
5 Mostly
Transactions."
1987,"U.S.International
Juneand December
of CurrentBusiness,
Survey
of Commerce,
U.S. Department
Source:
0

185
Understandingthe concern about net indebtedness
This new state of indebtedness has caused a great deal of concern
in many quarters. While dramatic changes in measures of international economic activity merit attention, concern over America's
net indebtedness is exaggerated.
The prevailing thoery describing how we became debtors is responsible for much of the anxiety. The most common explanation is
that the persistent American proclivity for saving too little in relation to investment widened the current account deficit (the balance
of trade in goods and services) and "sucked in" foreign capital. The
savings deficiency is blamed on the budget deficit. This theory however, is dependent on the idea that capital flows merely accommodate changes in the current account. But there is another view.
The capital flows can be regarded as a vote of confidence in the
U.S. economy. It is safe to say that a strong economic recovery coupled with lower marginal tax rates on dividends, capital gains, interest income, and profits was bound to lure investors to the
United States and to make U.S. investment abroad less attractive.
In this sense the capital account drove the current account.
Henry Wallich, former member of the Board of Governors of the
Federal Reserve, has argued that foreign capital "overfinanced"
our current account deficit. Foreign demand for dollar investments
exceeded the amount of capital needed to finance the current account deficit, causing the dollar to appreciate. The stronger dollar
caused the current account deficit.
The view that foreign capital was attracted because of world confidence in the American expansion is strengthened by a closer look
at the capital inflows. The prevailing view maintains that the foreign capital was attracted by the relatively high U.S. interest rates
caused by the savings-investment gap. This scenario does not explain why capital inflows accelerated and the dollar continued its
rise once interest rate differentials narrowed in 1984. Nor does it
explain the strong foreign demand for direct investment in plant
and equipment and the stock market-two sectors normally hurt
by high interest rates. Foreign investor confidence in a continued
American economic expansion cannot be ignored as a cause of the
dramatic shift in our net investment position.
Rather than a vote of confidence, many believe we experienced a
loss in prestige because of our "debtor" status. But it is difficult to
understand how uncoerced capital inflow signifies a loss in prestige. Why is it more prestigious to be a capital exporter when it
means that investment opportunities abroad are more attractive
than those at home? Similarly, why do some of the same people
who believe that importing capital has caused a loss of prestige,
criticize American companies for exporting capital by building
plants abroad and "taking jobs away from Americans"?
One reason for the feeling of diminished international prestige is
the comparison with troubled Latin American debtors. Besides the
obvious advantage in the size and strength of our economy, one
reason we are not a typical debtor is the special role of the dollar.
The dollar is the currency in which the majority of world trade is
priced and paid for. As a result, unlike other countries, the United
States borrows in its own currency and does not have to earn for-

186

eign exchange to repay its debts. Thus, there is no risk of a shorage
of foreign exchange. Also, because of the dollar's special role, foreigners always need to keep dollar balances to finance trade and to
hold as investments in Euro-dollar reserves. As long as the dollar
remains the dominant currency in international trade and finance,
foreigners will always be willing to hold dollar assets, thereby
"lending" dollars to the United States.
Aside from comparisons with troubled debtors, many Americans
are concerned about indebtedness because they are distrustful of
foreign investment. Even though foreign inflows have been a boom
to our corporate and banking sectors, and foreign firms in the
United States employed nearly three million people and accounted
for 26 percent of our exports in 1985, many Americans are wary.
They fear a loss of control. One argument is that we cannot rely on
foreigners because they could remove their investment at will. But
why would domestic investors be less likely than foreigners to pull
out if they can realize higher returns elsewhere? Domestic investors are presumbly just as rational as foreigners and will eagerly
shift their portfolios and plants and equipment out of the country
to realize the highest returns on their investments. This concern is
a good reason to make sure that tax and other economic policies
remain attractive to all investors.
Another concern is that foreigners are providing the credit for
much of U.S. economic activity. While foreign investment is playing an increasingly vital role in U.S. financial markets, concern
over foreign domination is exaggerated. Table IX.5 presents the
proportion of total U.S. credit market debt held by foreigners. The
proportion held by foreigners rose rapidly during the 1980s, but by
the third quarter of last year only amounted to 5.1 percent. Although not insignificant, foreign activities in U.S. credit markets
should not be overstated.
TABLE IX.5.-TOTAL U.S. CREDIT MARKET DEBT OUTSTANDING, 1981-87-l1l END-OF-PERIOD LEVELS
[Dollars
in billions]

Year

Total

Amount
heldby
foreigners

1981 ............................................
1982 .,
1983 .,
,
1984 ....
1985 ............................................
1986 ............................................
............................................
1987-111

,

..

5,643.5
6,313.5
7,225.2
8,278.8
9,
10,100.2

$5,183.2 $200.4
224.1
247.7
305.6
367.9
4 01.2 47
518.0

heldbyota
foreigners

0.5

3.9
4.3
3.9
4.2
4.4
5.0
5.1

of
positionof the UnitedStatesbecause
investment
statisticson the international
Department
Note.-Thesefiguresdiffer fromCommerce
accounting.
of
Governors.
Board
Resere
Federal
accounts,
Flowof funds
Source:

Another reason why the growing foreign investment is perceived
to be a problem is because there is a concern about "servicing" the
investments. Many analysts have attempted to measure this debt
service by applying a market interest rate to the U.S. net debt.
They predict that if the net debt expands from its 1986 level of
$263 billion to $800 billion by 1990, the debt service would be $60
billion. They conclude, as a result, our income and standard of

187
living would be reduced by $60 billion in 1990. There are two flaws
with this reasoning.
First, because our foreign assets and liabilities are held in a variety of forms, as described above, determining U.S. payments on the
foreign debt is a fairly complicated exercise. Debt service for the
United States is really "net investment income," or the excess of
earnings from foreign assets over the payments on liabilities. Even
though the net debt was $263 billion in 1986, the United States did
not pay net debt service. Instead the world transferred $23 billion
in net service payments to the United States. This anomaly is related to the measurement problem cited above. Because most
American foreign direct investment has been in place longer than
foreign investment in the United States, American investments
earn a higher rate of return on historical book values.
During the third quarter of last year, however, the United States
made net service payments of $300 million, and it is likely this
trend will continue. Careful estimates by the International Institute of Economics suggest that these payments are not likely to be
very large in the near future. With a net debt of $500 billion, the
service payments would be about $10 billion. This amount is less
than the United States transferred out as gifts and aid to the rest
of the world in 1986. If the United States continued to incur new
net debt every year equivalent to 3.5 percent of GNP, the Concil of
Economic Advisors estimates that net debt will reach 40 Dercent of
U.S. GNP by the end of the century. This proportion would not be
much larger than Canada's in recent years, but would bear monitoring because of its historic size.
One factor often ignored is that our net indebtedness reflects foreign investment that has added to our national income and increased the productive capacity of our economy. Although the relative merits of foreign investment in government securities are debatable, the benefits of corporate investment are clear. As described above, foreign investment has been a boon to our corporations and banks.
Finally, these investments in the U.S. economy, if made by
Americans, would have to be serviced in exactly the same way.
Most people are not alarmed by debt service from Americans to
Americans because the funds are not "leaving the country." Foreigners, however, are not any more likely (nor any less likely, for
that matter) than Americans to take their interest and dividend
earnings on U.S. investments from the country. They, like American investors, will be looking for the highest available returns. If
they expect economic policy to remain favorable for investment in
the United States, they will reinvest their earnings. To the extent
that funds do return to the home country, however, foreigners will
have increased ability to buy our exports if we remain competitive
and progress continues to open markets abroad.
The lesson for American policymakers is we can no longer conduct policy without regard to its impact on the expectations of the
world's investors. This development is not the result of "bad
policy," or indebtedness, or the decline of American economic
power, but rather is a reflection of the expansion and liberalization
of the world's capital markets.

188
X. SUMMARY AND CONCLUSION

Republican economic policies instituted by the Reagan Administration ended the stagflation and malaise of the late 1970s. These
policies, once taking hold, dramatically reversed deteriorating
trends in economic growth, interest rates, inflation, investment,
business earnings, productivity, and other indicators of economic
well-being. Most importantly, the economy has generated 15 million new jobs and real median family income has climbed 10.7 percent since 1982.
In addition, the trade picture is improving. In fact, U.S. exports
will likely represent this year's leading growth sector. Anticipating
real economic growth in 1988 to be approximately 2.5 percent, we
expect the economy will successfully enter its seventh consecutive
year of expansion later this year, extending the record for the longest peacetime expansion in U.S history.
The budget deficit remains a national concern and disgrace.
Comparing 1987 to 1980, the American taxpayer forked over $337
billion in additional revenues. But the Congress "managed" to
spend $414 billion more, adding $77 billion to the prevailing deficit
level. Since 1980, revenues have gone up 65 percent; higher tax revenues do not cause budget deficits. It is of little comfort to realize
that following the enactment of the Roth-Kemp tax legislation of
1981 that the share of the income tax burden paid by the affluent
rose from 35 percent to 40 percent, while that of the middle class
declined from 85 to 52.5 percent.
Once again, we Republican members of the Joint Economic Committee call upon the Congress to enact the balanced budget/tax
limitation constitutional amendment, and the line item veto. Furthermore, we encourage the President to test the constituionality
of his power under Article I, Section 7 of the Constitution to veto
any item of omnibus legislation that was subject to a separate vote
during the legislative process.
Strong, persistent, and reliable economic growth in the United
States, stimulated by tax rate reductions and other policies, have
attracted substantial investment from overseas. It is this inflow of
capital that has caused our much heralded and misunderstood
international indebtedness. Alarmists allege that the huge inflow
of foreign capital into the United States during the 1980's will require massive debt servicing payments to foreigners in the future,
thus forcing a recession, a long-term reduction in U.S. standard of
living, or both. Of the $852 billion in foreign capital inflows between 1981 and the third quarter of 1987, however, only 17 percent
went for U.S. Treasury securities. The remainder went for direct
investment in U.S. businesses (17 percent), corporate securities (24
percent), and U.S. bank liabilities, mostly foreign deposits (42 percent).
This massive movement of financial capital across national borders is paralleled by movements of technical capital, goods, and
services. Together, these capital flows are evidence of a new age in
international trade. The U.S. economy, being the envy of the world,
has been the model of this developing global., economic freedom.
This rapid integration of domestic markets necessitates better de-

189
scription and understanding to ensure that the United States maintains its leadership contribution in this historical development.
The ability not only of our free market system to adapt to
change, but also of American investors, enterpreneurs, and workers
to cause change is a principal reason why the United States is the
world's greatest economic power. This economic evolutionary process, if continually nutured by wise public policy, will hold Americans in good stead for generations to come.

THE SUPPLEMENTAL VIEWS OF REPRESENTATIVE
OLYMPIA J. SNOWE
Although this year I have joined in signing the Joint Economic
Committee's Minority Report, there are some matters that warrant
further discussion. These issues include the Minority Report's sections on the stock market break of October 19, 1987, omnibus appropriations measures, our trade performance and the distribution
of the income tax burden.
First, the stock market's sudden dramatic losses and high volatility subsequent to October 19, signaled Wall Street's loss of confidence in the ability of Washington policymakers to properly address important economic issues, such as the budget deficit. The
message from Wall Street was simple. It is critically important to
out nation and the economy for the Reagan Administration and
Democratic-controlled Congress to work together towards reaching
bi-partisan agreement on deficit reduction legislation.
And while I was disappointed that the Budget Summit's final
product did not make bigger reductions in the deficit, it was a step
in the right direction. having the Administration and Congressional leadership agreeing on the broad outlines of a $75 billion, 2-year
deficit reduction package demonstrated that consensus on important economic issues can be reached between the Executive and
Legislative branches. Clearly, the Administration and Congress
must continue to work together on the many important issues
before us this year, in light of the experiences of last October.
Second, I believe that the repeated use by Congress of omnibus
appropriations measures, commonly referred to as Continuing Resolutions, contributes to the avoidance of the tough choices that
must be made in order to reduce our budget deficit.
Government by Continuing Resolution, where massive appropriations legislation containing several hundred billion dollars in federal funds are passed in one single bill, represents and reflects deeprooted problems within the annual budget process. Furthermore, it
exacerbates our already serious fiscal problems by concentrating
too much decision-making ability with too few Members of Congress.
The normal legislative process and procedures for funding the
various departments, agencies, and programs of the federal government is seriously eroded by the repeated use of omnibus Continuing Resolutions by the Congress, to the detriment of the government and Nation. For example, this fiscal year, FY 88, was more
than a month old by the time the full House of Representatives
was given the chance to consider roughly $350 billion in funding
for the Defense Department, and foreign aid programs. To make
matters worse, the inclusion of this controversial funding in a continuing appropriations measure precluded the offering of any
amendments to make changes in this $350 billion.
(190)

191
During the March 2nd House Republican Leadership Conference
for the second session of the 100th Congress, I offered a resolution
that provided the Conference with the opportunity to join President Reagan and go on record againt the use of any omnibus Continuing Resolutions for FY 89.
The adoption of my resolution made it the Conference's basic
policy that House Republicans shall refrain from any participation
whatsoever in the drafting, preparation, and approval of an omnibus Continuing Resolution. My resolution also pledged that the Republican Conference intends to support presidential vetoes of any
such omnibus appropriations measure as well. This resolution allowed the House Republic Conference the opportunity to demonstarte again its strong commitment to fiscal responsibility, as well
as help avoid many of the budgetary and fiscal problems that
result directly from the reaped use of omnibus Continuing Resolutions.
In this regard, I know that there are many other proposals to address problems within the current congressional budget process.
These efforts have included this Report's calling for the enactment
of line-item veto power for the president. Without necessarily dissenting from that particular suggestion, I would simply express the
hope that Congress should give all such proposals to reform the
annual budget process serious review and consideration.
Third, I am concerned that the Trade Performance section
blames U.S. trade problems solely on macro-economic trends. This
analysis underestimates the impact of unfair foreign trade practices.
In fact, we as a nation have allowed our preference for free trade
to preempt action in the face of foreign trade barriers to commerce,
U.S. trade policies must react to the realities of international
trade, with its attendant volatility, manipulation and distortion.
As trade analysts Pat Choate and Juyne Linger conclude,
nearly 75 percent of all world commerce is conducted by economic
systems operating at principles at odds with those of the United
States. The loss of dominance by the free trade economies must
bring a dramatic shift in the overall goal of U.S. trade policy."
Other countries' governments do manipulate international trade,
and unless the U.S. takes responsive steps a segment of the trade
deficit will continue to mount, regardless of fiscal or monetary adjustments.
In addition to strengthening our trade laws, we must also
demand a much tougher enforcement of existing laws. This government must make a commitment to develop a strategy that provides
new and equal opportunities for American industries to compete at
home and abroad. On an equal footing, our industries can be highly
competitive.
Finally, the Minority Report's discussion of the distribution of
the income tax burden and the upward shift in the tax burden are
the last two examples of specific passages on which I find myself
having some concerns about the Report's implications.
The tax cut in 1981 was an important first step in the overhaul
our tax laws. That legislation "set the stage" for a much more comprehensive reform of the Internal Revenue Code by the 99th Congress in 1986. Some of the very positive aspects of this legislation

192
are its establishment of two basic individual tax rates of 15 and 28
percent, the removal of an estimated six million working poor
living at or below the poverty level from the tax rolls, and increased personal exemption and standard deduction amounts for
individual taxpayers that are intended to compensate for the reduction and elimination of some itemized deductions.
I would have preferred that the 1986 Act produce a more progressive tax code. Congress must continue to monitor closely the
final implementation of this multi-year tax reform measure and its
impact on lower and middle income taxpayers. The Congress may
need to make certain modifications in order to address concerns
and problems of this nature that may arise.
0